JP6627060B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachislot machine").

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of symbols by passing a game medium through a start area, and gives a predetermined game value when a stop result of the symbols becomes a predetermined mode. As such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine which controls a game medium to easily pass through a start area under a predetermined condition (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-079380 A

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with an effect of notifying the degree of expectation that the stop result of the symbol is in a predetermined mode or an effect of notifying that the game medium is likely to pass through the starting area. However, when a plurality of types of effects are simultaneously executed, there is a possibility that the effect of the effects may be reduced.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and in a gaming machine of a specification in which a plurality of effects are executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of a game by suppressing a reduction in effect of the effect. To provide a simple gaming machine.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a lottery is executed based on the winning of a game medium in the variable prize device, and a dynamic display can be executed. A gaming machine capable of generating a gaming state, wherein random number value obtaining means for obtaining a random number value from a generated random number based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area; It is determined whether or not to control to an easy winning state, and the random number value is stored in a predetermined storage area before executing the determination. Based on the determination result, a variable winning device control means capable of controlling the variable winning device to an easy winning state in which a game medium can easily win, and whether or not to control the variable winning device to the easy winning state. With determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect can be informed of a predetermined demonstration execution determining means for storing the random number value before performing the determination on the predetermined storage area, in accordance with the predetermined demonstration execution determination means Effect information transmitting means capable of transmitting effect information based on the determination result, and a specific effect execution for executing a specific effect capable of suggesting that the result of the lottery is a specific result while the dynamic display is being performed. and means, on the basis of the effect information, before the variable winning device is controlled on the winning easy state, before including Kisho a predetermined demonstration execution unit capable of executing a constant effect, and the winning easy state control determination determination by means and the predetermined demonstration execution judgment means is executed by the common processing with reference to the random number value stored in the predetermined storage area, the predetermined demonstration execution means, place where the specific effect is executed The, characterized in that it comprises a predetermined presentation restricting means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above-described problem and suppress a decrease in interest in a game.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine, and the door frame was opened to the main frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 4 is a block diagram around a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP in a sound control unit. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 17. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting mouth winning. It is a figure showing an example of a start mouth winning time control data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process. It is a figure showing the table related to notice permission judgment data, (A) is an example of notice permission judgment data address table, and (B) is an example of notice permission judgment data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to a special symbol reservation ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern selection judging processing. 30 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the variation pattern selection determination processing of FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol change waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol / flag setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a gate passage. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of a general-purpose pre-reading determination prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a module configuration of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reception command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure showing an example of an effect selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of the random number extraction range in chronological order. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of a pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special figure pre-reading effect control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetch effect. It is a figure showing an example of a continuous look-ahead production lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous pre-reading effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect form selection table for selecting the form (specific effect) of the continuous look-ahead effect. It is a figure showing an example of a screen transition of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a general-purpose look-ahead production process. It is a figure showing an example of a general-purpose look-ahead production. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an execution possibility table. (A) is an example of a table showing conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch prohibition count process in a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a reception command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an input unknown flag setting process in a received command analysis process of Modification 2. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening display process. It is a figure showing an example of an effect transition in a probable change time saving state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production mode shift processing performed by peripheral control MPU450a.

[1. Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machines]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and that is open on the front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101 for storing gaming balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape extending in the up-down direction when viewed from the front, and their horizontal widths in the left-right direction are substantially the same. The dimensions of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 move forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which game balls are driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and projects forward below the game window 101. As shown, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts his / her hand into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various prize holes, and other useful objects in the area 1100.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facilities of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other. The connecting members 14 connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). Note that an upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by the user's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with an upper support member 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower portion arranged to face the upper support member 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12. A supporting member 21; a reinforcing member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13; and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing member 22. 23. The upper support 20 and the lower support 21 support the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. The main frame support formed on the main frame support 644 of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 so that the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 is inserted. After the main frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main frame 3 is engaged with the support hook hole 20c to easily mount the main frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) which are arranged inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are used by the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main frame 3 when closing the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 1). The key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and is turned to one side, so that the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. It is possible to release the closed state of the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by disengaging.

[3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support 630 and a lower shaft support 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the main frame base 600 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball; and a prize ball unit 700 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to a lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Have been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening 601 through which a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and a main body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the front end outer periphery excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and a concave from the front of the front end frame portion 602 toward the rear, from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 are formed. And an engagement groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  The lower part of the main frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame part 602 and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604; The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engaging with the out ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board stop of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in a left and right direction in a plate-like shape which is suspended downward from an upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4. And The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. I have. In addition, the game board locking portion can regulate that the right side in the front view of the game board 4 moves in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position depressed one step behind the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and a ball launching device on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The hit ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side in front view of the upper end of the firing rail 660 of the hitting launching device 650. It has become. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending from the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left from the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and a plurality of openings formed on the upper side of the opening and on both the left and right sides in the front view. And a through-hole 615 penetrating through the hole. The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  The main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 at the lower front surface of a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become. The body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 will be described. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are respectively attached to the metal attachment portions on the upper and lower rear ends on the left end in front view of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. 7, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view (FIG. 7). The vertical extension of the door frame shaft support hole 634 into which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the downward extension from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in the front view restrict the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 is provided for the door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5, and is disposed below the door frame support 642 to support the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main frame support 644. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to a lower bracket mounting portion on the lower side of the body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which the shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted vertically through the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the extension 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft bracket 642, an attachment portion, a front extension portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the body frame shaft support 644 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to a lower metal mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A front extending portion 644b that protrudes, and a body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. In the main frame supporting member 644, the mounting portion and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 has a mounting portion of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and a mounting portion of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 overlapping (contacting) in the front-rear direction. The front extending portion 642b and the front extending portion 644b of the main frame supporting member 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal mounting portion of the main body frame base 600.

  When the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main frame base 600, the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main frame support holes of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 4). The front extension 644b of the main frame support 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper support 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pins 633 into the support hook holes 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become.

  The upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft holes of the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. 5 is placed on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft support 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting the door frame 5 in the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the up and down direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is used. Is temporarily slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball firing device 650 will be described. The hitting ball firing device 650 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and is mounted on the lower rear wall of the firing base 652 so that the rotation drive shaft 654 a projects forward. A launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a predetermined position on the movement locus of the hammering tip 658. A hammer tip 658 at the tip of a hammer 656 passes between the firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left from the position as a base end and attached to the front of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that forms a gap through which a game ball cannot pass at the same time as it is made possible and holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 662 and a stopper that regulates rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopper 662 can be hit. 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a to a tip of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664; It has. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 contacts the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated more toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  When the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located below the foul space 626, and A game ball that has not been driven into the area 1100 and has become a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko machine at the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko machine to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. To pay out to. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 600 and a prize ball tank mounted on the rear upper portion of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a game ball arranged by the tank rail unit 730 to a predetermined position. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching the game balls to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft 725. One end of the ball leveling member 727 is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end thereof hangs down by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a width (depth) in which troughs can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction in a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open top, and a left end (axial support side) in front view. The bottom is inclined so that is lower.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 includes an aligning gear 732 rotatably supported above the outlet of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the aligning gear 732, and a tank connected to the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the rail 731, a ball stopper 735 which can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and which can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet. , Is provided. The two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and communicates with the lower end of the supply passage and has a predetermined width. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage which communicates with a lower end of the distribution space on the left side (open side) when viewed from the rear and bends in a substantially rectangular shape and opens on the left side of the distribution space; (A shaft supporting side), and a ball passage that extends downwardly and communicates with the lower end and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball extraction passage are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable, and is provided with a first gear disposed behind the motor support plate, a second gear meshing with the first gear, and a second gear meshing with the second gear. A third gear, a dispensing rotator that rotates together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side of the third gear so as to be integrally rotatable in the circumferential direction and the like. A rotation detection board formed with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits at intervals; a ball-out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage; It holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game sphere at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the payout rotator, one game ball supplied from the supply passage is rotated. The balls are accommodated in the recesses one by one, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball passage. In addition, three detection slits formed in the rotation detection plate that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection plate, and correspond to recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotator can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the respective detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (payout rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The prize ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removing passage, and the game balls paid out to the ball removing passage become ball removed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end to open upward. A prize ball receiving port for receiving game balls flowing down the ball passage, a branch space arranged below the prize ball receiving port and extending in the left-right direction, and a game from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side. A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball exit 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opens at the right end of the front end in front view, and is separated to the right in rear view from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space. And a full tank exit 776 that guides the game balls from the position toward the front and discharges the game balls flowing through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left of the normal ball exit 774 in front view. ing.

  The full tank branch unit 770 has a ball receiving opening for receiving a game ball flowing upward through the ball discharging passage of the prize ball device 740 and opening upward at the left end of the upper rear end when viewed from the front. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has flowed through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end in front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776. And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branch unit 770 closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first sphere entrance 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is opposed to the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with the ball through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main frame base 600 in the rear view of the main frame base ball-extracting passage, so that the game balls released from the ball outlet are connected to the main frame of the main frame base 600. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  In a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, when game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that cannot be brought out to the plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 becomes full. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot enter the normal passage, and starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally becomes full. So as to be supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet from the full tank outlet. Has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear face of the lower rear wall of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear face of the board unit base 810 in front view, A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply box holder 840 and formed so that the rear end is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view. And the board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is opened upward and receives game balls discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 on the left front surface rather than the left and right center in front view; A discharge passage 842 that guides the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharges them, and is opened forward and upward at the front (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. And a box housing portion formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is depressed forward, and capable of housing the front end of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and that the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810. The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the rear lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. Has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape open at the front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to The power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The dispensing control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has a rear opening, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side, and has a front opening, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 that is attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Also, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error clearing unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, an operation is performed to cancel the error. The function of clearing the RAM at the time of turning on the power and the function of clearing the RAM at the time of turning on the power (when the period of performing the function as the RAM clear has passed. And a function for canceling the error in (2). A detailed description on this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 attached to the rear face of the substrate base 871 and having the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 fixed rearward, A game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 to which the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed rearwardly attached to the rear surface of the terminal 871, and a board such that the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. A substrate cover 874 covering the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying an operation state or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko gaming machine facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is a CR unit relay. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame 5. The connection between the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like is relayed. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a board mounting portion formed on the front face of the board unit base 810 so as to face from the front face of the main body frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 have their front sides covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. The ball lending button 361, return button 362, lending remaining display 363 of the ball lending unit 360, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be given later.

  Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided on each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and on the operation unit 400. For relaying a connection between a dial drive motor 414, various switches for respectively detecting operations of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and a peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided on the operation unit 400 A description of various switches that detect the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape, and a door. A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A decorative unit 240, an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of the speaker 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and attached to the right side of the dish unit 300. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 penetrates the plate unit 300, is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and the handle device 500 for hitting a game ball is sandwiched between the door frame base unit 100 and the handle device 500. A foul cover unit 540 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540; Attached to the back of the base unit 100 to close the gaming window 101 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base body 110 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape, and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 at the front of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 at the front of the door frame base body 110 The speaker 130 includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base body 110 to support the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1), and a firing cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101. A main control board attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191 and provided on a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side (to the right side (axial support side) of the center in the left-right direction in rear view) from the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically illustrated, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, each of the decorative substrates provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. The wiring for electrically connecting the switch, handle, relay terminal plate 192, ball rental unit 360 of the plate unit 300, and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being gathered and bundled at the right (supporting side) position, it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is generally upwardly offset. Have been. In the gaming window 101, the left and right inner edges are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. Further, a rectangular notch is formed on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base main body 110 so that the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). A speaker mounting portion disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, a right (open side) end of a front surface which is disposed at a lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. A handle mounting portion for mounting a handle bracket which is inclined obliquely so as to retreat, a wire passage opening through which the wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and an upper side of the handle mounting portion A lock hole 116 is formed in the shape of a cylinder extending short forward and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. In the door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along a back surface of an upper side portion of the door frame base body 110, and a pivot supported along a back surface of a pivot side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (refer to FIG. 1) attached along the lower surface of the lower side, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  An upper support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. It is provided integrally. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft supports 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that is in contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided at a rear lower portion of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion is formed. The engagement between the hook 104 and the hook cover 165 is released, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740, and fires the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via a ball sending unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and straight forward from the center to the right. It is formed to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and this portion bends downward, for example, when the player presses it downward by hand, When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses his / her hand on the screen of the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken first before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is broken. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper-panel upper panel 314 and attached to the upper-panel upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 to be replaced and reused.

  Further, the plate unit 300 has an upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball pulling button 341, and a lower plate ball pulling button 354. The lower bowl removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower bowl 302 through the lower bowl removing hole 324b in response to the operation of the lower bowl 302 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown) Ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (pressable by the player). Operation unit), and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state, can move the dial operation unit 401, not only the operation of hitting the game ball to the player, , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the press operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  The operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, The rotation can be assisted, prevented from rotating intentionally, and a click can be given to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating a rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in a forward direction and a rotation for reversely rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining rental display unit 363. Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining power indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display board 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . The ball lending unit 360, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the remaining cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hit ball launching device 650 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the upper plate balls. The lower plate 302 can be pulled out by operating the upper plate pull button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an entrance where game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet opening below the entry port and is open at the back, and a box shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open at the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying game balls that have entered from the entrance of the front cover to the hit ball firing device 650, and a rotation about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball-pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning part that separates between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partitioning part of the ball-pulling member that is hit by the rear cover one ball at a time. Feeding to supply port 582a, between upper and lower covers before and after cover And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member receives one ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member receives the ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hit ball firing device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and having a cylindrical shape and a front end bulging round in a direction perpendicular to the axis. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body, and the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is disposed. A front end cover 508 fixed to the handle base and cooperating with the handle base to rotatably support the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached to and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and is fitted with the bearing portion of the shaft member. A potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft portion rotatably fitted and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and detection of the potentiometer 512 fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base A switch support member having a through hole through which a shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 mounted on the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 mounted on the rear surface of the switch support member at different positions. , A single-shot button rotatably supported by the switch support member to operate the firing stop switch 518 And a handle disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member, and for urging the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). A return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506. In addition, the front of the rotary handle 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated from the original rotation position to a limit rotation position which is a maximum rotation position in a clockwise direction in a front view (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). I do.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, and A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 at a firing angle corresponding to (a commensurate with) the rotation angle before the main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotation position after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body. I have.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, and the game ball is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game is fired by the hit ball firing device 650. The game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base having a front side opened and a flow path for a plurality of game balls therein, and a front cover for closing a front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a disposed at the upper right corner in a rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a first ball inlet 542a communicating with the first ball inlet and extending rightward in a front view as heading toward the front end of the cover base 542. A single ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (to the right in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a, and inside the cover base communicating with the second ball passage. And a second ball entrance 542c extending downward and inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The height of a portion of the second ball passage extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the cover base is set to be about three times the outer diameter of the game ball, and a predetermined amount of the game ball is provided. An accommodation space capable of accommodating is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is provided with a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward and a foul that can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. A ball passage. Further, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece comes into contact with the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening the opening / closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet and a second ball outlet disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The first ball outlet of the front cover is configured to be connected to the upper ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage opening of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball exit 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a from the first ball exit through the first ball passage to the plate unit 300. Can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via a lower plate ball supply gutter and a lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball launching device When the game ball fired by 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be able to swing by game balls stored in the accommodation space. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 for detecting the swing of the swing member, and a spring for urging the swing member in a direction in which the swing member becomes a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The rocking member has a lower end pivotally supported with respect to the cover base, and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. The left side wall of the housing space is held substantially vertically. Is formed. The swing member is urged by a spring to a position where the swing member is substantially vertical. Further, the swing member has a detection piece projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. In other words, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the player operates the handle device 500 to form a game area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery, and a position at which the front component 1110 can be viewed from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner in front view. And a plurality of openings 1158 which are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150 from the front side, and a gaming panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  The game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image visually recognizable by a player according to a game state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 so as to cover the game panel 1150 from the rear side.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The front component 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the area 1100 is partitioned. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1112 that is disposed substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, an end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that allow the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 to contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. At the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer opening guide surface 1115, which is lowered rearward, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112, and closes between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position opened in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front constituent member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 1). ) Is located on the extension line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by contacting the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return to between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow of the game ball is prevented by the backflow prevention member 1116.

  Also, if the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the starting ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000, the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201, etc., they flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100, An out-port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the player to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150, and is discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. (See FIG. 1), and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the fal cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626. It is designed to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is arranged to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 disposed, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side as viewed from the front of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and is opened downward, has an upper side formed in an arc shape and is recessed from the front side, and a lower end in a front view And a notch 1122 for a ball passage extending in the left-right direction upward from the lower end in the vicinity of the left end of the ball passage. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the game board holding opening 601 (see FIG. 5). ) Can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction at the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3. By locking to the stop, the right end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in the front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  The fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is provided with a game board fixing tool 690 (see FIG. Is rotated clockwise in front view, the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is fixed by the game board fixing tool 690. The lower end is restricted from moving forward. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150. In this state, the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  In addition, a function display unit 1180 described later is arranged at the lower right of the front component 1110 in a front view.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 includes an attacker unit 2100 disposed above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front of the game panel 1150, and an outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the left of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the front of the game panel 1150 and supported by the game panel 1150 at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100. I have.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. Thereby, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nails implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 can prevent the movement of the game ball. Change can be given by using In addition, the front unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A starting port 2101, a lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101, and a rectangle which is disposed below the lower starting port 2102 and extends in the left-right direction more than the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides and slightly above the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received by the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the special winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, so that game balls can be always received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) is disposed between the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive a game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. Note that the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  The special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported at the lower side, so that the large winning opening 2103 can be closed in a substantially vertical state to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and that the upper side moves forward. , The large winning opening 2103 is opened so that game balls can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 has a special winning opening 2103 closed in a normal game state, and is specially selected when a game ball is received (starts winning) by the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. In response to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99), and a variable winning opening (variable winning device) Is composed.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, so that game balls can be always received (winned).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 includes a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received by the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received by the special winning port 2103. 2110, and the game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received by the upper starting port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side winning opening material]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left portion from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and are arranged to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100. A general winning port 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the game balls received by the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 has a left end located at an upper left end thereof at a position substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and are located at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). (A 2103 side), and a second shelf portion 2203 which is lowered toward the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202. I can do it.

  Note that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if a game ball is brought to the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility that a prize will be awarded to the general prize port 2201. In addition, a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center of the game area 1100 is provided above the two general winning openings 2201.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although not shown in detail, a side winning opening decorative board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in the back unit 3000 described later is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200. Are light emitting decorations.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The center role item 2300 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100 and the outer peripheral surface. The outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region of a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the left side and the outer periphery of the game region 1100.

  The center role 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from the position slightly closer to the right and left in the center in the left and right direction on the outer peripheral surface above the front wall located at the front of the game panel 1150. When the game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center role 2300, and at the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center role 2300. In other words, when the game balls are driven so that the game balls enter the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center role item 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game balls is reduced. The length of the game can be adjusted as appropriate, and a sense of tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming a loose game.

  Also, the center role item 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp exit (not shown) for discharging game balls into the frame, and a center ball for discharging the game balls discharged from the warp outlet into the game area 1100 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling left and right. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of 2300.

  Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 of the center role 2300 is provided with a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied, and a game ball disposed in front of the first stage and arranged from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction becomes lower. A chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the center of the first stage in the left-right direction, and the game ball having entered the chance entrance 2313 has a chance at the lowermost front surface of the center role 2300. It is configured to be discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) with a high probability in the upper starting port 2101. ing.

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center role item 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side. Has become.

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer surface extending leftward above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall located on the front side of the game panel 1150 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112. An arch 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from the substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which game balls can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thus, a game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center role 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down through the rear side of the arch portion 2315 and downstream. .

  Further, the center role item 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting the passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance which is disposed above the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion and through which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball which has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 that performs the game and a gate exit that discharges the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is connected to the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if it has dived.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light emitting portions formed in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150 outside the opening 1158 into which the center role object 2300 is inserted so as to penetrate in a circular or X shape in the front-rear direction. The decorative holes are used for light-emitting decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light-emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center role 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 disposed behind the lower panel lens 2520. A lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the light-emitting decoration hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, its tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game flowing down the front surface of the game panel 1150 is formed. It does not affect the sphere as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can make the LED of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate emit light as appropriate, so that even when an opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used, a region where the game ball flows down can be illuminated. In addition, the player can see the decoration of the gaming panel 1150, which has never been seen before, and can distinguish the pachinko gaming machine 1 from other pachinko gaming machines by making the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand out.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and has a back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. An upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. And a body unit 3500.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative board 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that guides the game ball, which is disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received by the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100, downward. And a guiding member 3018.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed at the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally long rectangular lamp driving board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp driving board 4170 and a lamp driving board box 3423 below the lamp driving board box 3423. The motor drive board box 3430 which is arranged on the side and accommodates the motor drive board 4180, and which is fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and is arranged on the left side in the rear view of the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430. Panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally long rectangular upper resistance substrate disposed on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. , Is further provided.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each of the units 3100 and 3400 formed into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. The back unit 3000 is configured such that each of the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 moves independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement changes the game state to the player. And the arrival of a chance can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. It is fixed. The back box 3001 has a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, through which the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, and 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 (the right side in the rear view) protruding outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view. A liquid crystal supporting portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear. The fixing member 1902 on the other side (the left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member, so that the liquid crystal is supported. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths. Each flow path is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper starting port 2101 is provided with an upper starting port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2104 is provided with a general winning port switch 3020. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed above the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface and has a circular decorative body unit 3200 which is circular in front view, and a lifting mechanism which is disposed on the rear side of the rotary decorative body unit 3200 and moves the rotary decorative body unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotary decorating unit 3200 can be moved up and down by a lifting mechanism 3250 between a rising position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowering position located substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, a rotating decorative body formed in a shuriken shape arranged on the front surface is rotated, and the rotating radius of the rotating decorative body is expanded by its centrifugal force by rotating. It has become.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative body unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes radially outward, the rotational radius of the entire rotary decorative body increases, and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating, and to strongly attract the player's interest This makes it possible to easily select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  The swing decorative body unit 3300 includes swing decorative bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotary decorative body unit 3200 located at the ascending position. You can swing your body all the way to the left and right.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with a plate-shaped ceiling decoration body extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center. Has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body that schematically represents a ninja, and moves in the left-right direction from the rightmost position to a position closer to the center side according to a playing state. Is available. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured to be able to reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction and to reciprocate around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Is available. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform a motion as if the character is nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to a game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral substrate box 1905 that accommodates a peripheral control substrate 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 and arranged. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko game machine.

  The function display unit 1180 is a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. Device 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184 comprising two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183, and displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls to the upper starting port 2101; An upper special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as a first special symbol a first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and which is drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101. A display 1185 and a second lottery that is arranged diagonally above and to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by receiving a game ball into the lower starting port 2102. A lower special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and a lower starting port composed of two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. And a lower special symbol storage and display device 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to 2102.

  The display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2350 which are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. And a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs, and a normal symbol drawing result which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2350. Opening and closing of the large winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. A round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (the number of rounds).

  The game state indicator 1183 is a full-color LED whose color can be changed between red, green, and orange, and various game states (in accordance with a combination of a light-emitting color and lighting / flashing). For example, it is possible to display a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, and the like.

  The upper special symbol storage display 1184 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 when the upper special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner ( The stored number of the first special symbols (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b. The upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on and off by a lighting / flashing pattern. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. When the number of reservations is three, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 in a variable manner, when the game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The stored number of the stored second special symbols is displayed. The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on / off by a lighting / flashing pattern. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. When the number of reservations is three, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. Can be recognized by the player (variable display game).

  The ordinary symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED whose emission color can be changed to red / green / orange, and the gate unit 2350 is played by a combination of the emission color and the lighting / flashing. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, like the special symbol, displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188 is a normal symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be changed and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. Is displayed as the number of reservations (the number of storages). The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a made of a predetermined LED and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, and when each of the lamps is turned on, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed. It has become.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. I have. Gaming state display 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, ordinary symbol memory display 1188, ordinary symbol display 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 to the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the function display unit 1180 at the rear end thereof.

  In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that It is possible for a hall clerk or the like to recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without being confused. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. 14 is a block diagram around the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP in the sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on and performs a game operation. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary interruption of a predetermined voltage. And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring the sign of a power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile storage unit. In this nonvolatile storage means, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by a manufacturer that manufactures the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. . Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile storage means and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit 4100b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And is composed of The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs the information by outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal based on the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  The upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102, and the general winning port 2104 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. I have. Also, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2201, and a ball having entered the large winning opening 2103. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signal from each of the switches, so that the main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, the upper special symbol display is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, Drive signals are sent to the special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol memory display 1184, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190. Output.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. By outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main control output with reset function is performed. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. For the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Detection of game balls also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count switch 2110 frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the game balls do not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, mechanical switches having shorter life than proximity switches are used.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b. Various commands are received at the input terminal as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function. Accordingly, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a mainly includes a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects the bus 4100ah. Is connected to the circuit. The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to a method of transmitting as serial data, but may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing when a command is stored in a ring buffer or on condition that the command is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. It is provided with BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in the power-off process. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the memory when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. (Cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 which performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. And a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. For adjusting the volume of music, sound effect, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of a sound control unit 4160 described below. Various kinds of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and light emission of various LEDs, etc., continuing over the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time the V blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information such as information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state and information for managing a special effect flag. ), And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c cannot retain the stored contents only for a time period in which an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and a state in which the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 851, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it cannot be retained.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a runs out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 4 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor Motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to a dynamic drive source from a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to a peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits the LED from the serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided on the operation unit 400 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are supplied to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). Diagnose whether or not.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a mainly includes a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I / Os. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak read and write various data via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between an I / O port 4150ag and an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ＤＭＡDMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading from and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d that are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the I / O devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae include a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a frame decoration driving amplifier board, a motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a serial I / O port for obtaining operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, the movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output, and an upper decoration on the door frame 5 is provided. For example, a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant weight in the game. It should be noted that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled. Music and sound effects are played from the provided speaker 130. As described above, music and sound effects are played from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a content related to a game effect. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the player is informed that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player, etc.). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The sound flow from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later) by a program. So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, even when, for example, a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the notification sound set to (the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played, and in addition to music and sound effects, to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is specified. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source, a track number for designating a track into which sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. The backlight of the game-panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness-adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the luminance becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%. The backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, a peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs, information to be backed up for exclusive use. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy area 4150ce for exclusively storing copied data, and backup non-management data for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, data not to be backed up. A work area 4150cf is provided.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and is cleared to zero. Regarding the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later). Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is “Bank”. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 4150cb to the backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(1fr)” indicates that, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, it is added to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” will be described later. As described above, every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and therefore, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively appended. (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, which is a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (for an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set, while other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like are provided. Have been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored. The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. An operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca, which is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. Includes various kinds of information (for example, the operation unit 400 receives the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405) based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided are set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is set. When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transmission data storage area 4150cab stores the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transmission data storage area 4150cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. You. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf stores a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door-side is set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds on the basis of this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmit data memory area 4150cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. In some cases, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It has become.

  Next, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is the contents copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is stored in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150 cc is managed as one page, in which Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) are one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) are one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc is a pair of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr), and a pair of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). The instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on) Is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, .) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da includes effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the control of the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporate a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”). A VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are displayed. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed; Includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame as viewed from the player The body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of 3 is visible, the service mode screen image data used to display the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used to display the break timer setting screen Screen image data and screen image data during a break used for displaying a screen during a break are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to incorporate the sound source. Output to VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control ROM 4150b. After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source is generated. Output to built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the first sound command data.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. VRAM for performing the operation (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1, and outputs the image data to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470, the gaming-panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, sprite data is created, and one screen (1) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Frame data) is generated in the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is shifted upward from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps for a second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Further, even in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer system. The “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this system, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. The output channels are set, and the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. Sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, and sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or misconduct with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified up to the master volume value, so that the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified. Is set so that the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. It is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker to be housed and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and the Indicates the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used and the sound of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used. And the maximum volume without depending on the volume control based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound. Amplify to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serialize the amplified notification sound to make audio data as audio data. Output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Briefly describing the control of emitting a notification sound to notify a hall clerk of fraudulent acts, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value of the notification sound set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the sound does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, but the effect sound is generated as described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the elapse of the period, the volume of the effect sound that has proceeded according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the mode is shifted to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and adjusted, the sub- Volume value), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3, and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows to notify a store clerk or the like of a wrongdoing of the hall, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided on the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. Although the sound produced by the speaker 130 flows from the speaker 130, the effected sound has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data. And when the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw in the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. And the upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music and sound effects matched to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5.

  The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential system between the right and left sides of the board from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, so that a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 4150c, and sets the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a Christmas tree or a reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. A screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds not only calendar information and time information but also LED luminance setting information when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted as an LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED which is a backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is of a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture which is the hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes the luminance setting information when the game panel liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight, the input date and time information, and the like. In addition, information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the luminance setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the date and time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be set to a desired value. You can adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight, the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 The luminance reduction due to the aging of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and sets calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the currently set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, based on the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, when June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired for If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 0b, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85% further increased by 10% which is the correction information obtained by the correction. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140, and the current date and time may be specified.

[7-2-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to turn the knob for controlling the volume of music, sound effect, and the like flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 are provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

  As described above, music and sound effects are played from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1; Inform the player of the contents related to the game effect (for example, an announcement that the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, or that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player). Sound, etc., flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are made by rotating the knob. The sound flow from the mute to the maximum sound volume is controlled by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (the sound source built-in VDP4). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, even when, for example, a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the notification sound set to (the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, a transition is made to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. . The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and the effect sound is updated. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the above-described notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are controlled. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to keep the main frame 3 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. However, with the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall, there are cases where the player feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, and there are cases where the player feels loud and feels noisy with the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the user operates the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, enters a customer waiting state, and performs a demonstration using the gaming panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Accordingly, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk of the hall to hear the music and the sound effect because the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is small, the operation unit 400 is not used. The dial unit 401 and the pressing unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the store clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the operation unit 400 The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, and the game panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 repeatedly waits for a customer waiting state (for example, ten times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. Thereby, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time feels the volume adjusted to be low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, A player sitting and playing a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume, and previously sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game When the player who has performed the game feels loudly the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud with the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and performs a game this time uses the dial operating unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling an effect performed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying occurrence of an error, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, normal figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power actor related, notification display, state It is divided into indication and others.

[8-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization Direction Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 change pattern, special figure 1 design type, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 design type command is for specifying the outlier, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command is a game state (high probability state, time saving (Playing state, etc.). The change state designation command has a value corresponding to the game state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of the change or when the game state is switched. Further, other special figure 1 tuning effect-related commands include a special figure 1 change type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying a change type corresponding to a change pattern.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 1 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). Further, the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 change pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing described later.

[8-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 is composed of a special figure 2 change pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command named “Special figure 2 tuning effect end”. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 pattern type command is for specifying the off, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect. Further, similarly to the special figure 1, the special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the special figure 2 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, and the special figure 2 tuning effect The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Further, as described above, similarly to the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 2, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 change pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 15, a jackpot opening, a jackpot 1 opening N-th display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (where “H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening 1 opening N-th display command is started during opening of the jackpot 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. The special winning opening 2103 is instructed during opening or opening of the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (the special winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 round is being closed or the closing is started), and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Although only one type of status and mode is set in the big hit ending command shown in FIG. 15, a mode value may be set according to the game state after the big hit. For example, when the gaming state after the big hit is the low probability non-time saving game state, the mode value is set to “01H”, and when the gaming state after the big hit is the high probability time saving game state, the mode value is “04H”. The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Also, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the gaming state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the game state is a high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery. May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the big hit ending command.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening command is started during the small hit opening (while the small winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is being opened or opened at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (in the case where a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning opening 2103 is opened in the Nth round, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is started). The mouth 1 count display command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is counted by the count switch). 2110), and the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-high winning opening (when the game ball hitting the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the section of power-on is composed of various commands named power-on. In this power-on command, "D * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on). is there).

  The transmission timing of the power-on command is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and around step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process. A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Related to tsuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1189, which are named “starting a general figure synchronizing effect”, “specifying a general pattern”, “ending a general figure synchronizing effect”, and “specifying a state when changing”. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (where “H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, shown in FIG. 15).

  The general figure synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronizing effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode. The general figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect end, and the fluctuation state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designating command is transmitted immediately after the general figure synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands called opening per figure, open display of normal power, and ending per figure. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. Ending state, or when expanding), and the ending per-figure-ending command instructs the start of ending per-figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened. (When expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending per-figure-ending command is transmitted when the ending per-figure-end is started. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-7. Information display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display section includes commands having the names of a winning error display, a connection error display, a disconnection / short-circuit error display, a magnetic detection switch error display, a door open, and a door close. ing. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, shown in FIGS. 15 and 16).

  The winning prize display command indicates that a game ball enters the special prize port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins the special prize port other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device), and the game ball enters the big prize port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. (When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection of the unit has occurred, it indicates the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door opening command is such that the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame is closed, the door frame closing command is issued, and the door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in the state, it instructs the end of the door opening notification. On the other hand, based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the main frame 3 is in the open state, the main frame 3 is closed and the outer frame 2 is closed based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch. In this state, the end of the body frame release notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize display command is transmitted when a prize is won at a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). The command is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending the command to the controller. Are transmitted when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch), The close command is transmitted when the body frame is closed (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the division of the status display is composed of commands having a frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navigation command (corresponding to an error release command), and a frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, respectively, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . Note that the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives “7 * H” as shown in FIG. 16 when receiving the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110. The status is set, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state changes, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration. , And when the frame state changes. In addition, these shaped frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, shown in FIG. 16).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[8-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 16, the other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 16, a start opening prize, a fluctuation shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” and “5 * H” are assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” indicates a specific number). , Which is predetermined according to the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening. When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on a detection signal from the switch 2109, an instruction to win the starting port is issued. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 changes the display of the special symbol). The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol change display on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 is displayed. The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reserves).

  The special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls increases (when the number of reservations increases when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101). The special symbol 2 reserve number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserve balls increases (when the number of reserves increases when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102). The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command and the special symbol 2 reserved number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1”, and prefetched when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. Represents none. When the special symbol 1 hold number designation command has a look-ahead, the special symbol 1 hold is read ahead and the special symbol is used before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special display 1185 on the function display board 1191. An instruction to start a look-ahead effect for notifying a notice of a display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on 1 hold is provided. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is pre-read, the pre-reading is performed before the special symbol 2 reservation is used for the special symbol change display on the special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191. An instruction to start a look-ahead effect for notifying a notice of a display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation is given. The symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command are transmitted when transmitting the special symbol reservation number designation command. It should be noted that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol reservation number designation command is prefetched.

  The symbol type pre-reading command is used to specify a miss at the time of pre-reading, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The variation pattern pre-read command specifies an effect pattern (variation pattern) in the mode at the time of pre-reading. The variation type pre-read command specifies a variation type in a mode at the time of pre-reading.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is read in advance by the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol reservation before the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. This is for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect to notify a notice of the display result. As for the ordinary symbols, an ordinary symbol storage command, an ordinary symbol type prefetch command, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern prefetch command corresponding to prefetching may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, the term "look-ahead" refers to the look-ahead of a special symbol.

  In addition, when performing the pre-reading determination, as described later, the same processing as at the start of fluctuation is performed to generate a command including an effect pattern or a symbol. Since it becomes impossible for the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the command to distinguish between the start of the change and the winning of the starting opening, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting port winning command is a starting port winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or when the lower starting port switch is activated). When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is mainly transmitted by voice to notify the user of the change, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is performed at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been determined after the specified number of fluctuations have been shortened (elapsed stop period After). The high-probability-end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is determined (after the loss stop period elapses) after the high-probability count in the case of “high-probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol indicator 1185 on the function display board 1191 is still used to display a special symbol change display). In the state where there is no pending number, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is increased, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display a special symbol change. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is used for changing the number of the special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls (when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the special symbol indicator 1186 on the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol). In the state where there is no pending number, when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the retained number increases, or when the retained number is used, the lower special symbol display 1186 is used to display a special symbol change display. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The ordinary symbol storage command is used when the number of ordinary symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (the number of pending balls not yet used for the variation display of ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate 2350). In a certain state, when the game ball further passes through the gate unit 2350 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves is reduced from the number of reserves by using the normal symbol display 1189 to display the variation of the normal symbol. ). As with the special symbol, a normal symbol reservation number designation command that changes depending on the presence or absence of the pre-reading may also be transmitted. As in the case of the special symbol, the presence or absence of prefetching is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of the ordinary symbol 1 operation-reserved balls increases (when the number of retained balls increases after the game balls pass through the gate 2350). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  Further, instead of the normal symbol type prefetching effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command and the normal symbol type prefetch command, such as the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol prefetch command related to the symbol type, may be transmitted separately. . In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol reservation number designation command, but it is not necessary to limit the command to the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command. It may be transmitted prior to the symbol reservation number designation command. The same applies to the case of transmitting a prefetch command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command) and a symbol type of a normal symbol (normal symbol type prefetch command) instead of the normal symbol type prefetch effect command.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). (When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of the above), the speaker mainly provided by the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 mainly outputs the sound. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, besides notifying by sound from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraud is monitored. It is a specification that it is also used for On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, for example, a game machine related information command for transmitting game machine related information including model information of the game machine may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined opportunity. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can execute the effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, the main control board is configured to always transmit the normal symbol type prefetch effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a model that executes the prefetch effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the prefetch effect. If the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the model is capable of executing the prefetching effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the gaming machine related information command, the normal symbol type prefetching effect transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 is performed. While the command is processed as a valid command to enable the general-purpose prefetching effect, if it is determined that the model does not allow the general-purpose prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there is a model that can execute the pre-reading effect and a model that cannot.

  The main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process executed only once when the power is turned on (one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Or, a plurality of times during the game (when the starting opening winning, at the start of the fluctuation, at the time of a big hit (hit if a normal figure), when the game condition is changed, etc.), the execution of the timer interrupt processing is triggered (Periodic timing). The transmission at the time of power-on is not limited to the transmission during the power-on process, as long as the process is performed at the time of power-on. For example, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and is stored in the command buffer while the normal processing (main processing and timer interrupt processing) after the power-on processing is completed is executed. The transmission of the gaming machine related information command is also included.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, if the effect is executable on the peripheral control board 4140, it is processed as a valid command. It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even when the effect to be executed differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, the control program of the main control board 4100 can be shared, and the control program of the main control board 4100 can be developed for each model. This eliminates the need to perform the test, and shortens the development period and the test period in a testing organization.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, processes of an initial value updating type counter, main control-side power-on processing, main control-side timer interrupt processing, and the like will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit for use in determining an initial value of the big hit determination random number A random number for determination of an initial value for determination, a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a big hit gaming state is not generated, an upper special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol The random number for the variable display pattern to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variable displayed on the display 1186, and derived by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. For the big hit symbol used to determine the big hit symbol to be displayed, and for the big hit symbol used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. The above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol is a random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol which is derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit game state. Also used as. On the other hand, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol described above is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not the pair of movable pieces 2106 should be opened and closed, and a random number for determining the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol hit are used. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining a variation display pattern of an ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from a minimum value to a maximum value) by a predetermined arithmetic expression ( In the present embodiment, the value is updated according to a certain rule so that all values appear within the value 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767 as the maximum value. Thereby, an unbiased random value can be extracted. Further, the random number value is updated based on a 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing a 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator into two by the main control MPU 4100a. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the random number array of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number arrays of other cycles. As described above, since the arrangement of the random number sequence generated in each cycle is different, it is difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  The above-mentioned random number is a so-called hardware random number, but may be a random number (software random number) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 and the maximum value is 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then increases from the minimum value (value 0) to the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Every time the update of the jackpot determination random number is completed for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the jackpot determination initial value determination random number, and the determined start value , And the update is sequentially repeated again. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for jackpot determination is determined by the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is sequentially repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. If the game information is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value in a main control side power-on process described later, a checksum value (sum Value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (when the power is turned off). When clearing the area, the jackpot determination random number is taken out of an ID code that is different for each main control MPU 4100a set internally for each main control MPU 4100a, and is used for big hit determination based on the extracted ID code. The random number is set as a start value of a random number, and the big hit determination random number is updated from the start value. Therefore, an initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the big hit determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the jackpot determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. The first security countermeasure that the ID code is not rewritten even when an external device is used and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, while being stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a. In this way, the analysis is performed by taking a two-stage security measure based on the second security measure that the start value of the random number for jackpot determination always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a based on the ID code. Is prevented. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the random number for jackpot determination may be set by extracting the above-mentioned hardware random number. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, a different start value of the big hit determination random number can be set each time even for the same game board, and security can be further enhanced.

  Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value of the random number for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who tries to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value, the ID code is assigned a unique code to identify the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in another game board, that is, in another pachinko game machine, and therefore, the ID code obtained by disassembly and analysis is used. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each interval and a game ball is thrown into the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 at each predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the initial value update type counter fetches an ID code from the built-in nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the fetched ID code. An initial value deriving process for constantly deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the random number for the jackpot determination is updated as the random number for the initial value determination for the jackpot determination. An initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the counter of the initial value update type counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value is counted up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability-change-time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a case where the value 10 to the value 209 is set for the low probability and the value 10 to the value 339 for the high probability is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers to be a big hit (the random number for big hit determination) is 200, and in the high probability, the number of the random numbers to be the big hit (random number for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random numbers to be simultaneously acquired is 200 In addition, for example, the number is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the timing of obtaining the random value differs from the random number for jackpot determination, the number of random numbers to be the jackpot can be prevented from being a prime number. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, the number of the big hits determination random numbers (50) obtained by dividing the number of the big hit symbols (200) with a low probability by 4 (50).

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) has a minimum value and a maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of the above. In such a case, a period from the time when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when the value becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), Compared with the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability of being randomly selected by the above-described initial value lottery process in the former period is much lower than in the latter period. In other words, a range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is upwardly started by irradiating the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the counter of the initial value update type is set to one of the values of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range). Can be said to be high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, the timing before the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes the value 0, before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability and the value 31767 for high probability) is reached, and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability and value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) When compared with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the counter of the initial value update type has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (the value 32667 for the low probability, the value 31767 for the high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). Of these, any value becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the random number for the initial value determination for jackpot determination described above, so that from the value obtained in this lottery to the maximum value It counts up and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , From the value obtained by the lottery to the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, from the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) to the maximum value side. When the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes a value 0, the value (low value) immediately before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 is set. The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the value with the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular, which is rich in randomness. Thus, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by radiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the counter of the initial value update type is determined to be one of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  Note that the initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the fourth cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the counter of the initial value updating type, the counter to be updated has a fluctuation with respect to the time when the updated value is the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range). (By excluding) from being detected by the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the main control-side power-on processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the above-described main control program executes the main control-side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as shown in FIGS. Do. When the main control-side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets a stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address to a stack pointer, and loads the contents of a register, a return address, and the like from the initial address on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result indicates that the logic becomes HI when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure notice signal.

  In step S14, if there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program executes the power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic thereof is set to HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. Is input to Thus, main control MPU 4100a can set D-type flip-flop MIC to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure notice signal from its output terminal 1Q when it latches the state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR as LOW.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs to the main control MPU 4100a an error clearing navigation command (first error clearing command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110. It depends on whether or not it has been done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that it does not instruct RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and operates the operation switch 952. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation switch 952 is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is cleared, and the operation switch 952 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system shown in FIG. 7 for controlling the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 is started (FIG. 7). Boot). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not deleted. If the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, if the game information is not to be deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is for calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information, such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and a backup flag BK-FLG value, in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S32). This setting includes setting a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, reading power recovery time information from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and performing the power recovery. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, `` power recovery '' means, besides the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is turned off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, the high frequency irradiation is detected and reset, It also includes the status after returning.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation processing, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S30, that is, if the main-control-side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates that the game information is to be erased, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in the nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out in advance, and the random number for the jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as a jackpot determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the above described jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 15 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initial setting has been performed is generated. Test commands for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are generated as shown in FIG. 16 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the main control program issues an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch). The execution of the game control-side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program converts the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 952 into the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the power-on as described above by the concept of time sharing as described above. The RAM clearing process is executed in response to the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted after the predetermined time has passed even if the error clearing navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing an error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 952 (error canceling unit), which should have been originally used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storage unit for a predetermined time from power-on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit to be described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a lapse of the predetermined time, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs non-hit random number update processing (step S50). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variation display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated. The above-described random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination and the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern are also updated by the non-hit number random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46, where the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, non-hit random number updating processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs the interrupt disable setting (step S52). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes a starting port solenoid 2105, attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol indicator 1186, an upper special symbol memory display 1184, and a lower special symbol memory indicator. The drive signals output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, and the like are stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. Note that the processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S30, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interrupt process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a on the main control board 4100 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control-side power-on processing (main control-side main processing).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). Clearing this interrupt flag allows other interrupts to occur. The clearing of the interrupt flag may be performed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. In this way, the management of the interrupt process is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to the occurrence of another interrupt during the timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and enters the special winning opening 2103. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a lower signal for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. A detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. From the payout control board 4110 that informs the payout control board 4110 that the payout ball command transmitted in the control processing has been normally received. Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. In addition, a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 are read. And the other start port winning command corresponding to the command shown in FIG. 15 is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109, The start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 are provided. , A detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350 is read first as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Are read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. Those not having the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it will be treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for the third to third times and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. Can be avoided, so that the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol and the The payout control board 4110 normally sends various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process. When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S78). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described large hit determination random number, large hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit number random number updating process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for the small jackpot symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination). Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by being incremented by 1 every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number update processing. The random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-described random number for determining a normal symbol hit and the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit are also updated by the hit random number updating process. The normal symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed by the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. The non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main main process) and the hit random number updating process in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine are updated. In the case where the number of executions of the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time of The random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the jackpot symbol initial value, and the random number for determining the small hit symbol initial value are determined in step S50. Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information. For example, a self-check command for confirming a connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. The main control program transmits the created award ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control processing, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code. For example, the main control program is output from the count switch 2110 in accordance with the reception of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103. When the detection information based on the detected signal is written in the corresponding definition bit area defined one bit at a time over several minutes of the special winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as a prize ball A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out, and transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since the two special winning openings 2103 are provided as the special winning openings, the main control program executes the above-described plurality of definition bit regions prepared in the main control RAM as the definition bit regions. From among them, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these are referred to as a “first bit area” and a “second bit area”, respectively. In the case of a gaming board having one large winning port, for example, one defined bit area is used. These used definition bit areas are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area, for example, the fourth bit, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that has recognized that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing “0” to prepare for the reception of the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 is assumed to be the fourth bit, the main control program of a pachinko gaming machine having only one special winning opening as in the present embodiment will be described. In this case, the main control program obtains information of the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program executes a mask process on the detection information thus obtained in accordance with a winning ball effective range of the special winning opening 2103 described later to create a winning ball command and write the command in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether output should not be performed to the payout control board 4110. If it is determined that this award ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a compulsory process as a mask process on each of the definition bit regions in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written. May be set to OFF ("0") to prevent the award ball command from being written to the transmission information storage area.

  In the prize ball control process, the main control program detects, in the first special game state, detection information corresponding to a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103, and When written in the above defined bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above is created. Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, The sound "Pokon" is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special game state, the main control program sends detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received to the special winning opening 2103 to the special winning opening 2103. If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, no prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this case as well, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). The payout operation of the game ball is not executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110, and sets a state where the payout of the game ball is permitted. I do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out the specified number of game balls that can be paid out in response to the reception of the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, the excessive winning abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 16). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in a command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since illegal payout of game balls is substantially prevented, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, if the main control program detects the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103 instead, the main control program immediately writes the excessive winning abnormal command in the transmission information storage area to control the peripheral control MPU 4150a. May be notified to the speaker.

  After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the command to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning can be confirmed by hearing.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 have the same command. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payout serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 4110 of that is output as output information to the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display of FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Here, the frame state 1 command corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the count switch 2110 detects that a gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 2103 when the jackpot is not in the jackpot gaming state, the main control program executes Then, a prize abnormal display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches a hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, if the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state, and if the probability change state is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability change state (winning probability control). means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state). Details of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of the start winning according to the type of the special symbol, or sets the lower special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so that 1186 is turned on, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, when the main control program shifts to the big hit game state, for example, various commands (big hit opening command, big win 1 opening N-th display command, big win 1) shown in FIG. (A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the attacker solenoid 2108A or the opening / closing member 2107 is operated to open and close. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2103 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the main control program performs two rounds so as to light a two round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is six, the round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 6 round display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is 12, the 12 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp is set so as to cause it to be stored in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 so as to light in a predetermined color whether or not the transition to the probability fluctuation state is made, and stores the output as output information in the output information storage area.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, after the start prize of a game ball, a special symbol is started to be changed and a big hit lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is satisfied and a predetermined stable change is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the game state indicator is changed, and the state shifts to the probability change state. In the probability fluctuating state, the probability of the above-mentioned big hit lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big hit is achieved. As a gaming machine that may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state ends in this way, mainly, the probability variation state is continued until the next big hit, as if the big hit game is looping. (Hereinafter referred to as a “loop machine”), and a machine that continues the probability fluctuation state until the number of times the special symbol changes to a predetermined number after the big hit game ends (hereinafter, “ST (special time) machine”) "). As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines of the models in which the probability variation state is continued differently, the control of the above-described gaming state indicator is different, and in the development stage, the control of the gaming state indicator must be designed for each model one by one. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not a winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In this case, the normal game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, while the winning condition is satisfied and, when the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively set as compared to the normal gaming state. The state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state set higher, and the display state of the gaming state display 1183 is set to the lighting state. When the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the main control program changes the display state of the gaming state display 1183 in a state in which the probability fluctuation state is continued, with a specific interruption cycle. Within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle, the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is changed from the unlit state to the lit state again after the lighting state is temporarily turned off from the lighting state.

  More specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. (Lottery means), when the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, and when the winning condition is satisfied and the probable change transition condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The state is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set relatively higher than the normal game state (game state control means). The main control program sets the display state of the game state display 1183 to the lighting state while the probability fluctuation state continues, and displays the game state display 1183 when the game state transitions to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). The main control program sets the display mode of the gaming state display 1183 to the lighting state upon the transition to the probability variation state described above, and thereafter, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from a lighting state to an extinguished state within a certain interrupt cycle in a state where the probability fluctuation state is continued, a game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the unlit state to the lit state again (lighting state continuation control means). Although the player wants the player to visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state is continuing, even if the display mode of the gaming state display 1183 is changed for a very short time in this way, It is possible for the player to visually recognize that the display state of the gaming state display 1183 has not changed.

  In this way, it is difficult for the eyes of the player to visually recognize that the light has been turned off once on the display mode of the game state display 1183, and the player can visually recognize the lighted state as if the lighted state is continuing. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously continued, the probability fluctuation state continues until the special symbol is changed to the specified number of times after the big hit game state ends. A program code for controlling the display mode of the game status indicator 1183 between different models, even for a so-called ST (special time) machine which, when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified number of times of change, then shifts to the probability change state again. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko gaming machines of different models.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above. When the certain change condition is satisfied as an example of the transfer condition, the game is also shifted to the certain game state as an example of the specific game state (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the certain-variable game state as an example of the specific game state without substantially paying out the game balls in the big hit game state. Note that the specific game state may be a state in which a time-saving operation condition as another example of the transition condition is satisfied and the time-saving function is operating, or both of the game modes may be simultaneously performed in addition to the above-described probable changing game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of changing and displaying the special symbols during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state to the transmission information. In the transmission information storage area, and thereafter, in the same timer interrupt period, the data is transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later (game state notification means).

  More specifically, when the main control program satisfies the above-described probable change transition condition, the special symbol is variably displayed until the game state transitions to a game state other than the probable change game state, for example, the normal game state. The information on the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is transmitted after being included in any command transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, the information is transmitted in a command transmission process S92, which will be described later, within the same timer interrupt period (remaining change count notification means). Note that the main control program may include the above-mentioned remaining number of times information in other commands, or transmit the information to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, a subroutine which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes is generally called by a CALL instruction included in a main routine and executed after a program code group included in the program module is executed. Is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, it is necessary to provide an instruction for calling back, so that it seems at first glance that it is difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes successive subroutines, for example, instead of calling and executing the first subroutine with a CALL instruction and then successively calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction, Alternatively, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, and may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With a program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). Details of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and a gate passing process is performed based on the input information. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol hit is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  Further, following the processing at the time of passing the gate, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for a normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and executes the main control program. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance (referred to as "normal lottery"). The main control program determines whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation based on this determination, the game state in which the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and the lower starting port 2102 can receive the game ball becomes a game state which is advantageous to the player. Move to

  Further, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination based on the value of the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and classifies the variation display pattern related to the ordinary symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. Commands are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the main control program executes the normal electric game effect-related Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106. The output information described above is used as the output information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program executes the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined on the basis of the above, the various commands classified in relation to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal is determined. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1189 is set so that the ordinary symbol display 1189 is illuminated in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when the jackpot is in the jackpot gaming state, and a starting opening solenoid for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the 2105, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a 6-round jackpot information output signal, a 12-round jackpot information output signal, a 16-round jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data (command Transmission means). This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and various kinds of special figure 2 tuning effect related shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, a special winning opening 1 count corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103) Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general-tune synchronizing effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects effects, various types of signals shown in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a command that is stored in a ring buffer as a command transmission buffer and is output first is used. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, within the same timer interrupt process, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86) is executed, and then the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S88) is executed. Since the command is stored in the command transmission buffer before the general-drawing-related pre-reading command, the special-drawing-related pre-reading command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the general-drawing-related pre-reading command. You.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit) A frame state 1 command (a second error occurrence command) is transmitted to the CPU (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program sends a command to the peripheral control board 4140. To send an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error canceling navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error canceling navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 ( The main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means, second specific frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (a second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (a door frame command sending unit, a second door frame command sending unit, a second specific frame command sending unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 (production control). Unit)) (a door frame command sending unit, a second door frame command sending unit, a second specific frame command sending unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control-side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on a stack by hardware. This prevents destruction of the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets interruption permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special pattern and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit determination random number by +1 by a counter, and accepts a game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, that is, When the start winning is achieved (start condition is satisfied), the value of the above-described counter is taken out for each start storage information (start information) in which the start condition is satisfied, and the value is used as the big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in a built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot game state based on a lottery result, and when the random number for the jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). Is changed from the normal game state to the big hit game state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and indicates a game state collectively referred to as these.

  The main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening for each round, One of the main control built-in RAMs, in which definition data (table) indicating the closing time of the special winning opening for each round and the number of game ball winning limit counts is specified by an address offset according to the number of the special winning openings. The data is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has won the lower large winning opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When the game ball has won the lower winning opening (result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the lower winning opening has been won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the gaming ball has won the upper winning prize port (large prize port 2) (step S104). If the game ball has won the upper winning opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the upper winning opening has been won is set (step S106). The count switch 2110 detects whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening. Further, when each of the winning specification commands is set, the detection is not limited to the detection by the count switch, and the special winning opening is opened and the respective winning specification commands are detected when detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be the gaming state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number may be a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed the upper gate (combination operation gate) (Step S112). If the game ball has passed through the upper gate (result of step S112 is "yes"), a winning combination operation gate passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning port (an upper starting port 2101 and a lower starting port 2102). First, a start-up opening 1 identification value is set in a start-up opening identification area indicating a start-up opening to be determined for winning (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (Step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is performed based on the input information.

  When a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a starting port winning process (step S116). In the start-up winning process, a start-up winning command transmitted when a new game ball wins the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special symbol is formed. For example, a process for executing a prefetch effect is executed. Details of the start-up opening winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the starting port 2 identification value in the starting port identification area (Step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (Step S120). If a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (result of step S120 is "yes"), a starting port winning process is executed as in the case of the upper starting port 2101 (step S122). The starting port 1 discriminating value and the starting port 2 discriminating value are used as starting port prize processing so that a common starting port prize processing can be executed between the upper starting port prize and the lower starting port prize. Based on each identification value, information for identifying whether the process being executed is a winning process by the upper starting port or a lower winning port process, and is referred to in the starting port winning process. This is a value that is set so that a data table to be set and an area for storing winning information can be identified.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and after the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and special electric accessory control. The process ends. Note that the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information and are backed up in the main control-side power-off process.

  In the step S130 process, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a special symbol change process (step S132), a special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening the special winning opening (step S140), opening processing of the special winning opening (step S142), processing during closing of the special winning opening (step S144) ), A special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), a winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148), or a winning combination operation gate valid process (step S150).

  In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), the special symbol change in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. A process for starting display is performed.

  In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball having entered the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, whether or not the special symbol that has started to change and fixed and stopped generates the big hit gaming state. Is determined.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the effect is performed. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the user of the change is performed. Do.

  In the interval process before the opening of the special winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation for making it easy for game balls to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from a closed state to an open state is performed.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the opened state to the closed state is performed.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is ended, a process for notifying the end is performed.

  In the combination operation gate validity waiting process (step S148) or the combination operation gate validity process (step S150), the upper gate (combination operation gate) is activated, or the passing of the game ball of the upper gate is detected. .

[9-6. Start-up winning process]
Next, the starting-port winning process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start-up winning process in the present embodiment. The start opening winning process is executed in the processes of steps S116 (upper opening 2101) and S122 (lower opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  In the start-port winning process, the start-port winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created when a game ball is accepted to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. At this time, the starting opening winning command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  First, the main control program sets, as command data, start port winning command creation data for generating a starting port winning command (step S200), and executes a command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, the starting opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The starting port winning command of the present embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning port.

  Further, the main control program sets a start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning start-up opening based on the starting-up opening 1 identification value or the starting-up opening 2 identification value selected before the start-up winning processing. (Step S204). The start opening winning control data table stores data necessary for processing executed at the time of starting winning. Hereinafter, the start-up winning control data table will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the start-up winning control data table according to the present embodiment. The start opening winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 wins and a starting opening winning control data table 2 set when the lower starting opening 2102 wins. . Each table defines a special symbol reserved ball count command address table, a special symbol activated reserved ball count area, a retained history special figure identification value, and an offset value for referencing a retained information storage area, and has the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the top of the start-up prize-winning control data table corresponding to the prize-winning start-up prize-winning opening. Set the address as the control data address. As a result, since necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the head address of the set start-up winning control data table, data corresponding to the start-up opening is performed in common processing between the upper start-up opening and the lower start-up opening. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program obtains the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the number-of-operation-reserved-ball addresses set in the starting port winning control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reserved ball number address corresponds to the operation reserved ball number address (special symbol operation reserved ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation reserved ball number address is acquired as the reserved ball number.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (Step S208). If the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "yes"), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is “no”), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, the special symbol total operation suspension number (the content of the special symbol total operation suspension number area) which is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is incremented by 1 (step S212).

  Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol holding storage area) of various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by the start winning. Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol holding storage area (source code) relating to the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. Note that the line described as “special symbol 1” on the right side of each line in FIG. 23 is a special symbol holding storage area for the upper starting port 2101. Is a special symbol holding storage area for the lower starting port 2102. In the case of “special symbol 1 variation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the number of reservations. Each area stores a corresponding random number one by one.

  More specifically, referring to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value according to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is multiplied by a reserved storage area index value (a reserved information storage area reference offset value). ) Is added. The hold storage area index value is set to an offset value ("00H") if the value of the starting port identification area is the starting port 1 identification value, and if the value of the starting port 2 identification value is a special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area. _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value is added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the jackpot determination random number. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by common processing even if the starting ports are different. Further, by making the index values different depending on the timing of executing the common processing, it is also possible to store data in different storage areas. For example, when the big hit determination is performed at the time of the pre-reading process and at the start of the change, by setting different index values, it is possible to store the information necessary for the big hit determination in different storage areas.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the random number for jackpot determination in the special symbol holding storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (the counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the number of holding balls. In addition, besides the jackpot determination random number, a random number such as a jackpot symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation type random number), and a special symbol random number. A random number for determining a hit or a change pattern is extracted at the time of starting opening winning and is stored in a corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of reserved special symbol 1 balls is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is used as the head address, the random number for big hit determination is B_HIT_M1, the random number for reach determination is T_RIT_M1, and the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern is The random number 2 for the variation pattern is stored in T_HP2_M1, the random number for the variation type is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the random number for the special symbol is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a special figure identification value for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation in the new hold memory based on the special symbol total operation suspension number in a corresponding suspension identification history area (special symbol suspension identification). Area) (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of one byte at a time from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes an area corresponding to the new hold storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning control data table set in step S204. The special symbol holding identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper starting port (special symbol 1) or the lower starting port (special symbol 2). When the change starts, the value of the leading area of the special symbol holding identifying area is set. By making the determination, it is determined whether or not the change of the special symbol can be started.

  Finally, the main control program executes a memory look-ahead process for executing a special figure look-ahead effect (step S218). The special figure look-ahead effect is an effect in which the lottery result of the special lottery is implied in advance before the display of the change of the special symbol is started. In the memory look-ahead process, various random numbers are acquired before the special symbol variation display is started, and information for determining a special symbol look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value (hit information, symbol type, variation). Pattern number, etc.) and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At this time, the main control program may include, in place of the lottery result itself of the special lottery, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as information indicating the type of the big hit game in the command. For example, information of a stage before it is finally determined, such as a SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group, and a small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Details of the storage prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Memory prefetch processing]
Next, the details of the memory prefetching process (step S218) in the startup opening winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch process according to the present embodiment. In the memory look-ahead process, a process for executing a look-ahead to acquire the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol holding number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory look-ahead processing, the result is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute a suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

  When the storage prefetching process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) (step S240). Furthermore, a pre-reading non-preemption command is set as the reservation command (step S242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the change pattern changes at the timing of the start winning and the timing at which the change is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the start winning and the start of the fluctuation, and if the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different, the prefetch is prohibited. For example, the number of times the number of games in the time reduction state (the number of games) or the number of times the number of games (the number of games) is maintained is the upper limit of the number of holds (for example, when the number of special symbols is one and the upper limit of the number of holds is four, Four times, when the number of special symbols is two, and when the total value of the upper limit number of each reserved number is eight, eight times, and even when there are two special symbols, the variable display is started with priority given to one symbol. In this case, prefetching is prohibited if the number is within the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing after step S282 without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether or not the period is a prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not the period is the pre-read determination prohibition period is determined based on the notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, a notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning opening (set value of the start opening identification area) that has been won is set, and the notice permission judgment data corresponding to the special symbol / motor-operated accessory operation number and the flag during time reduction is set. To get. If the acquired notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if “01H” (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. The notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the notice permission judgment data. FIG. 25A shows an example of the notice permission judgment data address table, and FIG. 25B shows an example of the notice permission judgment data. In the notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. The notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on a special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on a time reduction flag (JITAN_FG).

  As a basic structure of the notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is information as a reference source (lower address of the RAM area of the reference destination), and the third and fourth bytes are prefetched. This is a reference table address for prohibition period determination. With the data of the second to fourth bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit, the data of the basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, it is needless to say that the number of times of reference is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. With such a data structure, any specification can be supported by modifying only the data value without modifying the program code.

  For example, if the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is a special symbol fluctuating (HEND), the notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and prefetching is permitted. Note that the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is numerical data. For example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1 and 0 in the special symbol change waiting (IDOL). If the game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the time saving state is set (the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as a reference table for the pre-read prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. Is determined. At this time, since the time-saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the pre-reading determination prohibition period), which is the data of the second row of the notice permission determining data 2, is selected, and the pre-reading is performed in the determination processing in step S246. Be regulated. The preview permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the pre-reading prohibition period corresponding to Tokujin Figure 2. Since the data selection is the same as the preview permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), a detailed description is omitted. I do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate determination tables. However, if the contents are the same, a common table may be used. The content may be completely different.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of the storage prefetching process in FIG. In the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the pre-reading determination and executes the processing of step S282 and thereafter.

  On the other hand, if the period is not the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the winning opening and the number of holding balls (the random number for each holding number is stored) The special symbol holding storage buffer (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to one special symbol holding storage area corresponding to one holding of the random number value stored in the special symbol holding area (general name of the area to be held) This is stored in the symbol random number buffer (step S248). Then, based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer, the pre-reading determination and the determination at the start of the change are performed. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the content of the special symbol holding storage area stored in association with the number of holdings is stored in the buffer, and at the start of the change, the information of the first area of the special symbol holding storage area is stored in the buffer, It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as a big hit determination) can be used in common.

  The special symbol holding storage area includes a special pattern 1 and an hourly pattern 2, a random number storage N area for jackpot determination, a random number storage N area for reach determination, a variable pattern random number 1 storage N area, and a variable pattern random number 2 storage N area. , Random number storage N area for fluctuation type and random number storage N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). Further, the special symbol holding storage buffer includes a random number buffer for jackpot determination, a random number buffer for reach determination, a random number buffer for variation pattern 1, a random number buffer 2 for variation pattern, a random number buffer for variation type, and a random number buffer for special symbol.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when the third hold storage of the special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 3 area is stored in the big hit determination random buffer, The value of the special design 1 reach determination random number storage 3 area is a reach determination random number buffer, the value of the special design 1 variation pattern random number 1 storage 3 area is the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, the special design 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is stored in the variable pattern random number 2 buffer, the special pattern 1 variable type random number storage 3 area value is stored in the variable type random number buffer, and the special pattern 1 special symbol random number storage 3 area value is stored in the special symbol random number buffer. I do.

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery with reference to each random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer set in the process of step S248 (step S250). . Details of the special symbol big hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the special lottery result (big hit) (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag and the like at the time of prefetch determination. At the start of the change, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  In the buffer related to the prefetching of the special lottery, in addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), a jackpot symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variable pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variable type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), a symbol type command buffer ( TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF) and a special symbol activation pending ball count buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

  It should be noted that a buffer for prefetching the ordinary lottery is also provided for the ordinary lottery, as in the case of the special lottery. The buffers related to the prefetching of the ordinary lottery include a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), an ordinary symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and an ordinary symbol operation suspension ball count buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this manner, the processing can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

  Further, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). After that, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the variation pattern selection determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type classification value (step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined for each variation pattern. One variation pattern can define one or more variation types. The fluctuation type corresponds to, for example, the type of the pseudo continuous fluctuation when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected. When a variation type type value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent a malfunction due to a remaining value when making a big hit determination.

  Further, the main control program sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). . Further, the reference value of the pending command with prefetch is set as the reference value of the pending command (step S280).

  Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (start winning prize control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set pending command reference value, a reserved ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer (step S284). Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball count command (special symbol reserved ball count designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data returned in the process of step S282, the address of the start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (the value of the start-up identification area) in which the game ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the start-up winning control data table is common irrespective of the value of the start-up identification area, the subsequent processing can be shared.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B are tables showing a table related to the special design ball holding number command, wherein FIG. 26A is an example of a special design holding ball number command address table, and FIG. . As shown in FIG. 22, the starting opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball count command address table (data (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) set at the head address of each data table. ), It is possible to refer to the special symbol reserved ball count command address table from the address.

  The main control program is a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 or a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 corresponding to the winning opening. , And based on the reserved command reference value set in the processing of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol holding sphere count specifying command creation data includes, for each special symbol, a pending command generation table when prohibition is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), and a reservation command generation when prefetching is permitted. A table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol holding ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3 bytes of data. The first byte data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the hold number, the second byte data is the default value of the value set as the mode data of the command, and the third byte data is the status data value of the command. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 hold storage number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of holds is 3), and the special symbol hold ball number designation command when there is pre-reading is the special symbol 1 hold ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B). Created based on Specifically, the status value is “62H”, the mode value is “02H” (number of reservations 3-1) + “11H” (default value) = “13H”, and the special symbol reservation ball number designation command is “6213H”. It becomes. Finally, the special symbol holding ball number designation command thus created is set in the command buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte of the special symbol reserved ball count specification command creation data (the default value of the mode value) is “01H” when read-ahead is prohibited, In this case, it is "11H". Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command become “0” when prefetching is prohibited and “1” when prefetching is permitted even after the number of reserved balls is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol retaining ball number designation command can determine whether or not there is pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol retaining ball number designation command. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol holding ball number designation command and refers to the mode value to wait until receiving the information (command) necessary for executing the special figure prefetching effect. Can be determined. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol holding ball number designation command is “0”, the processing can be continued without receiving the prefetch-related command. Note that the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the described order, and for example, a lower address of a storage area that refers to the reserved number is set in the second byte. What is necessary is just to set in a predetermined order. Furthermore, the information is not limited to three bytes (three information), and other information such as that associated with the output of the hold number command may be set as long as the data has a predetermined data configuration.

[9-8. Special symbol big hit determination process]
Next, the special symbol big hit determination process (step S250) in the memory prefetching process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination process determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning. This process is used in common at the time of pre-reading of the special lottery and at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (when changing display is confirmed).

  The main control program first obtains a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing a special lottery is acquired from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) based on the probability change flag (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability change flag. The probability change flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and is set to “00H” for a low probability and “01H” for a high probability. The special symbol big hit judgment lower limit data is set to a value according to the probability state, the lower limit data is selected based on the probability change flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by changing the lower limit data Has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). If the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is “no”), that is, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit, the big hit determination random number is It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step S306). In this embodiment, the range in which the big hit determination random number is generated is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of the random number determined to be big hit is the range from the big hit determination lower limit to the upper limit. ing. For this reason, the big hit determination random number may be determined to be a big hit if the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value. In such a case, a big hit may be determined. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, a comparison is also made with an upper limit value.

  If the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or less than the big hit determination upper limit value, the big hit flag is set to the big hit flag. The winning is set (step S308). Specifically, the big hit is set as the flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the jackpot flag storage area is a jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of the change, and a jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of prefetch determination.

  On the other hand, if the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is “yes”), or if the big hit determination random number is larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (step S304). The result of S306 is “yes”), and no winning (losing) is set in the big hit flag (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value, as in the case where the value is determined to be smaller than the lower limit value, the value at which the big hit flag is lost is set. Even if it is set, it is prevented that a big hit is erroneously determined. As described above, when the big hit flag is set, the special symbol big hit determination processing ends.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory prefetching process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process specifies a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot symbol determination extracted at the time of starting winning.

  The main control program first acquires a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big hit (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is set to the shifted symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the content of the big hit flag is big hit (the result of step S322 is "yes"), the main control program reads the big hit symbol number and big hit symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number. A number is obtained (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, a jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The big hit symbol type number is a number corresponding to the big hit type on a one-to-one basis. For example, there is a probable big hit with 16R pitching (01H), a non-probable big hit with 16R pitching (02H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (no time saving: latency probable, 03H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (with time shortening: probable) , 04H) and small hits (05H). The big hit symbol number is a plurality of values provided for the symbol type number. For example, 01H to 10H for a 16R throwing probability variable jackpot, 11H to 26H for a 16R pitching non-probability variable hit, and 27H to 3FH for a 16R probabilityless hit with no pitching (no time saving: latent probability variation), 16R 40H-55H is provided for the probable big hit (with time saving: sudden hit) without throwing, and 56H-5FH is provided for the small hit. In this way, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers are provided for the same jackpot type, which is displayed on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 on the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the special symbol (the special symbol) to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, a predetermined value (losing symbol command value (0)) is set to the missing symbol number instead of being selected from the table.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol type number (step S326). Finally, a special symbol number value is set based on the big hit symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process ends.

[9-10. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process according to the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol. Note that this processing is also executed at the start of the fluctuation as well as at the time of the pre-reading, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of the pre-reading and at the start of the fluctuation.

  The main control program first obtains a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2 according to the game state, a hit (hit fluctuation selection information state table), a loss (a loss fluctuation selection information state table), a reach (a reach fluctuation selection information state table), This is a data table storing table information for referring to a reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and a change type (change type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires a special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Further, an area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) in the variation information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block in the special symbol-specific variation allocation information source table ( Step S344). Subsequently, a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer for pre-reading or the special symbol winning flag area for starting the change (for example, 00H : Out, 01H: big hit, 02H: small hit (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether a big hit or a small hit has been won by determining whether the hit determination value matches the big hit value or the small hit value (step S350). If a big hit or a small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big hit change selection information type table is searched from the hit change selection information state table based on the state flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched big hit change selection information type table is saved. The jackpot change selection information type table is a jackpot change type (a change group in a stage before the jackpot change pattern is determined. For example, a change pattern finally determined, such as SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, etc. It is a table for selecting a group (groups are grouped). When the result of the special lottery wins the small hit and the case where the big hit is won, the selection of the variation pattern is determined based on the value set in the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is Since different values are set for the hits, it is possible to select a variation pattern by a common process for the big hits and the small hits.

  Next, the main control program acquires the big hit symbol type (the value stored in the big hit symbol type buffer when prefetching or the big hit symbol type area when fluctuation starts) (step S354). The set big hit symbol type is used in the change information number search processing in step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a design pattern setting data selection table for variation pattern distribution according to the value of the variation special figure identification area at the time of variation pattern selection. (Step S356). The variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is used to determine a type for determining a hit variation pattern selection value data table from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the value of the (hit) symbol type. It is a table.

  Next, the main control program executes the change information number search process using the big hit symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby obtaining the change information number (from the big hit change selection information type table to the hit change pattern selection value). A type value for determining the data table) is obtained (step S358). Further, the saved large hit change selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, by the process of step S358, the variable information number that is the result of the variable information number search process is set as a selection value (step S362).

  On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit has not been won (the result of step S350 is “no”), the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). In the state flag, numerical data corresponding to the game state is set. In the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-time reduction (normal game) state), 01H (high probability time reduction state), 02H Either (low probability time reduction state) or 03H (high probability non-time reduction state) is set. This makes it possible to select a special symbol reach probability according to the game state. Further, a reach determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change corresponds to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2). A threshold is obtained (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach fluctuation selection information status table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the winning start (step S372). Specifically, a reach determination random number is obtained from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold value obtained in step S368. The reach is generated when the reach determination threshold value is larger than the reach determination random number.

  If no reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets an outlier fluctuation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Furthermore, a search is made for a deviation change selection information reservation table corresponding to the state flag from the deviation fluctuation selection information state table (step S376), and the retrieved deviation change selection information reservation table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set as the selected value (step 380).

  The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of normal deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern in accordance with the number of suspensions. Is selected so as to be higher.

  On the other hand, when a reach is to be generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control program sets a state flag as a selection value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of reservations. However, the fluctuation time may be changed by the number of reservations in the same manner as in the case of an unusual case. Specifically, even if the reach fluctuation is the same, when the number of suspensions is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, a high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of the fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of suspensions is small. In this case, since the fluctuation times are different, different fluctuation pattern commands are set.

  When the processing of step S362, step S380, or step S382 ends, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), a big hit change selection information type table is set as search data, and a change which is a search result of the change information number search process in step S358 is set as a selection value. A pattern classification value for pattern distribution is set. If the result of the special lottery is out of order and reach occurs (step S382), the reach fluctuation selection information state table is set as search data, and the state flag is set as a selection value. Further, when the result of the special lottery is out of order and no reach occurs (step S380), the out-of-office change selection information reservation table is set as search data, and the number of reserved balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for the variation pattern (step S386), and executes a variation information number search process (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program obtains a fluctuation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selection data selection value from the fluctuation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and performs the variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390. Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

  The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit and the variation pattern set value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern random number 2 is set lower than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 for use is larger, the variation pattern set value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for variation pattern is selected. If the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. The process is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages based on two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, a variation pattern type (variation pattern group such as XX-reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally variation-displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. In addition, the method is not limited to the method of performing the lottery in two stages, and a method of performing the lottery in three or more stages may be employed, or the variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number. Since the current random number for each variation pattern is composed of one byte, the result determined by two random numbers is the same as the result determined by a total of two bytes. When a variation pattern is selected with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the change type determination processing (step S262) in the storage prefetch processing will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for variation type determination data corresponding to the status flag (step S400). Subsequently, the change pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and a change information number search process is executed (step S404).

  In the change type determination data table, different change type determination data is set according to the game state, and the change type determination data corresponding to the game state is selected by the process of step S400. The variation type determination data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern selection value is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set in the variation type determination data, and the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value. Is determined, the variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the variation pattern selection value is smaller than the variation pattern lower limit value, it is compared with the next variation pattern lower limit value, and the variation pattern lower limit value is changed until the variation pattern selection value is determined to be larger. It is executed repeatedly. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in the variation information source address table. Is determined.

  Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data address table for the variation type selection data corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number search process of step S404 (step S406). ).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the variation type random number as a comparison value (step S408), and executes a variation information number search process (step S410). At this time, the change type selection data obtained in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the change type setting value is obtained by the change information number search process.

  The variation type selection data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type set value as one set of data. By executing the fluctuation information number search processing, the fluctuation type random number is compared with the fluctuation type random number lower limit set in the fluctuation type selection data, and the fluctuation type random number is lower than the fluctuation type random number lower limit. Is determined to be large, a variation type setting value corresponding to the random number lower limit value for the variation type is selected. If the value of the random number for the fluctuation type is smaller than the lower limit value for the random number for the fluctuation type, it is compared with the next lower limit value for the random number for the fluctuation type, and it is determined that the value of the random number for the fluctuation type is larger. It is repeatedly executed while changing the random number lower limit value for the fluctuation type until the value is changed.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol change display is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, a preparation for starting the special symbol change display is performed.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the special symbol change display is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next from the value stored at the top of the special symbol hold identification area is not 0. . If the loaded value is 0, that is, if the special symbol change display is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol change display is not started. The processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol change display is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the special symbol change display. Specifically, first, since the variable display when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 (special symbol 2) is preferentially executed, the special symbol 2 is set as the starting port identification value (step S422). ), Special symbol 2 change setting data is set as the change setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set in the fluctuation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball count area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). If the special symbol 2 reserved ball count is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set as the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data. It is set (step S432).

  The fluctuation setting data is constituted by a RAM and a data table address which are referred to for executing the fluctuation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. As a result, it is possible to execute a common variation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The change setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The first byte is the lower byte of the address of the pending ball count, the second and third bytes are the reserved ball number designation command creation data address, the fourth and fifth bytes are the transfer source address when the reserved memory area is transferred, and the sixth and seventh bytes are reserved. The transfer destination address at the time of storage area transfer, the 8th and 9th bytes are the transfer source address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, the 10th and 11th bytes are the transfer destination address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, and the 12th and 13th bytes are the changing setting data. Address.

  After setting the fluctuation setting data, the main control program stores the starting port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (Step S434). Next, in order to start the change of the special symbol, the number of the operation-holding balls corresponding to the starting port identification value and the total number of the special symbol total operation-holding stored in the special symbol total operation-holding number area are decremented by 1 (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438), and sets the command in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the command for specifying the number of pending balls set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt process. The command creation table (FIG. 26 (A)) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is common to the pre-reading time, and the same table is used at the pre-reading time and at the start of the fluctuation to save the program capacity. I have.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of starting opening winning. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol holding storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol holding storage area, holding memories (starting memories) including various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by a winning start are stored for each of the winning openings. When the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory is started, the reserved memory in which the fluctuation is started is cleared, and the remaining reserved memory is shifted. For example, when the maximum number of holdings is four, the holding storage stored in the special symbol holding storage 2 area is shifted to the special symbol holding storage 1 area, and similarly, the special symbol holding storage 3 area and the special symbol holding storage 4 area are shifted. The stored holding memory is shifted to a special symbol holding memory 2 area and a special symbol holding memory 3 area. Then, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The special symbol hold storage area shift process stores the value set in the transfer setting address in the hold storage area transfer, which is set in the fluctuation setting data, in the hold storage area transfer destination address, and stores the value in the hold storage area transfer. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address at the time of transfer to the reserved storage area are updated to the next address, and the data stored in each reserved storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the data-in-fluctuation setting address set in the variable setting data as the setting data address, and sets information necessary for executing the special symbol fluctuation processing executed in the next interrupt processing. A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern reference command is set. If the special symbol 1 is the special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern reference command is set (step S452). S456).

  Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-order command data (Step S458). Further, a variation type type value is obtained from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452 or S456, thereby obtaining a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and a command storage process for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer. If the special symbol 2 is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. It is set (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a change state designation command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since the generated commands are transmitted in the order in which they were generated (the order in which they were stored in the command buffer), when the transmission order was changed, the command generation order (the order in which they were stored in the command buffer) was changed. do it. For example, if it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the fluctuation pattern command, the processes from step S466 to step S472 may be executed before the processes from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold storage on which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, areas for storing eight special symbol holding histories (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, four for each) are allocated, and a variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started. And the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, the area in which seven special symbol hold histories are stored may be shifted. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process ends.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of the variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol / flag setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for performing a special lottery big hit determination in a big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol for starting the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol big hit determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2) The special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set. Then, the set special symbol big hit determination random number is stored (transferred) to the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, a special symbol holding storage area to be changed is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in a corresponding area of the special symbol holding storage buffer. In addition to the special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) big hit determination random number storage 1 area, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area To the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number value stored in the special pattern 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage 1 area to the random number 1 buffer for variation pattern, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern The random number value stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation pattern, and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation type random number storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation type. Symbol 1 (Special symbol 2) The random number value stored in the special symbol random number memory 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of a change, and sets an address value of a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) to execute a special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination processing is executed at the time of prefetching (when it is executed in the processing of step S250 of the memory prefetching processing), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the big hit flag. Is set. As described above, the area of the RAM to be referred / stored before the special symbol big hit determination processing is executed is set in advance at the time of the pre-reading and at the time of the fluctuation, so that the “special symbol big hit determination processing” is set at the time of the pre-reading and the time of the fluctuation. It is possible to share in. The procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process is as described with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the special lottery result (big hit) (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared at the time of prefetching and at the time of change as in the special symbol jackpot determination process. It is as expected. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches for a special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number setting value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the processing of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (7-segment or the like) (step S520). In addition, if the determined symbol number is set as it is as the display data of the special symbol display, it becomes a fixed display pattern, and the type of hit may be easily identified by the player in the mode displayed on the special symbol display. For this reason, the display pattern is acquired so as not to become a constant display pattern by the calculation. In addition, it is possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant, but it is necessary to hold the display pattern as much as the number of symbol types increases, the display pattern The storage capacity for storing is increased. Therefore, by acquiring a display pattern by calculation, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity while preventing a player from identifying the display pattern.

  The main control program finally adds the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process to an area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (1 is added to the address of the searched special symbol stop area). (Step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process ends.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation reserved ball count area (special symbol 1 activated reserve ball count area or special symbol 2 activated reserved ball count area) corresponding to the special symbol for which the variable display is started is set. The value of the special design operation reserved ball count area (special design operation reserved ball count) is set as the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set storage value is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is common to the process of step S258 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between prefetching and variation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, and will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. It is as expected. When the variation pattern selection determination processing ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (Step S544).

  Next, the main control program searches the special symbol variation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546). At this time, the obtained fluctuation time value becomes a reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between prefetching and variation as in the special symbol big hit determination process, as described with reference to FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value data for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type classification value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo runs. Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference change time value searched in the process of step S546, and acquires a final change time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting processing ends.

[9-15. Normal pattern and normal electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is started, the main control program first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate unit (general figure gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate section 2350, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input processing of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Input information is written to the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

  When a game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes a gate passing process (step S802). In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, a value of a counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as gate information. The details of the gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game ball has not passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is "no"), or if the process at the time of passing the gate has been completed, the normal control / normal electric accessory The process corresponding to the ordinary symbol / electric accessory operation number is retrieved from the operation call table (step S804), and the retrieved process is executed (step S810).

  In the step S810, based on the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number, a normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), a normal symbol change process (step S814), a normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), a normal symbol loss A stop process (step S818), a stop process per normal symbol (step S820), a normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), or a normal power operation end interval process (step S824) are executed.

  In the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350, a process of starting the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol changing process (step S814), a process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit determination process (step S816), a win determination of a normal lottery or the like is performed based on a game ball passing through the gate unit 2350.

  In the normal symbol loss stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, a process of stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 and notifying the user of the fact is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit stop processing (step S820), when a normal lottery is won, the normal symbol display 1189 stops displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol and notifies the user of the fact, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessory). Processing such as setting the open / close state of 2106 is performed.

  In the normal electric accessory opening / closing processing (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the lower starting port 2102 can receive the game ball, and the lower starting is performed. Processing related to an operation of making the mouth 2102 unacceptable for game balls is performed.

  In the ordinary power operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 has been completed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, the details of the gate passing process (step S802) in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, a command transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected is set, a random number for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a prefetch effect is executed. Or the like to execute the processing.

  In the process of passing through the gate, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, the value of the counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted, and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Hereinafter, the procedure of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the processing at the time of passing through the gate is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol operation reserved ball count area as the operation reserved ball count (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value of 4 (step S832). If the number of active balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the processing at the time of passing through the gate ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation-reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is "no"), the main control program stores the number of operation-reserved balls in the normal symbol operation-reserved ball number buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the content of the normal symbol operation reserved ball count area to update the normal symbol activated ball count (step S836).

  Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the ordinary symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations (step S838). More specifically, the ordinary symbol random number storage area is divided into a 0th segment to a 3rd segment in predetermined units, and each segment is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved ordinary symbols. In this embodiment, Each time a gate passes, a random number for determining a hit of a normal symbol and a random number for determining a hit symbol of a normal symbol are stored in a normal symbol random number storage area. Since the random number for hit determination and the random number for symbol design are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. Note that the random numbers stored for ordinary symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a random number for reach determination for ordinary symbols or a random number for variable pattern is provided as in a special symbol, these are gated. A configuration in which the information is stored for each pass can be adopted.

  Finally, the main control program executes a normal symbol prefetching process based on the storage of the newly stored ordinary symbols (step S840). Details of the normal symbol prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal pattern prefetching process]
Next, the details of the ordinary symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the gate passing process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ordinary symbol prefetching process according to the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the newly stored ordinary symbol holding memory, and the general symbol prefetch effect is performed by the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. Information for determination (ordinary symbol type prefetch effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Upon receiving the normal symbol type prefetch command, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general symbol prefetch effect can be executed, and performs a process according to the determination result.

When the normal symbol prefetching process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the prefetching determination value to prohibition (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period has been reached during the execution of the process (step S852).

  Here, a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, whether or not the prefetch determination of the normal lottery is prohibited is determined based on the operation (open) state of the movable piece 2106 (ordinary electric accessory).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the normal electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to a winning probability of a special lottery, and a time reduction state corresponding to a variation time, a winning probability, and an operation mode of a normal electric auditorium in a normal lottery. The probability states include a low-probability state (normal state) and a high-probability state (probable change state) in which the special figure lottery winning probability is higher than the low-probability state. The time reduction state includes a non-time reduction state and a time reduction state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter, the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is higher than in the non-time reduction state, and the operation time of the normal electric auditorium (the lower starting port 2102 It is configured such that the time during which the ball can enter the ball becomes longer.

  In addition, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, the opening mode of the ordinary electric auditorium of the present embodiment includes a short opening mode in which the game ball is hard to enter the lower starting port 2102, and a sufficient length of the game ball in the lower starting port 2102. There are two types of operation modes of long opening that can enter the ball. Further, the opening mode of the short opening and the long opening may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. Although the short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port, in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball can easily enter the starting port as in the long opening mode. In addition, the long opening may be a different opening mode between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and may be an opening mode in which the rate of winning in the starting opening is further increased in the time saving state compared to the non-time saving state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, so that the ordinary figure pre-reading effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

  On the other hand, even in the case of the short opening, the prefetch effect may be executed. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect in the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the long opening or the short opening, and the sense of expectation by the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. In addition, by making the look-ahead effect different or only partially different between the short opening and the long opening, the player can identify which opening pattern is to be used, and perform a firing operation corresponding to the opening pattern. Thus, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, as for the pre-reading effect, a gaseous effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. The gaseous production is a process in which the look-ahead production is performed, but in the event that the production does not succeed (fail) in the end, it informs the player that, as a result, the normal electric accessory will not be opened. You may. Although the gasse effect is disappointing for the player as a result, the opening operation is always performed when the pre-reading effect is performed unless the gaseous effect is provided, so the player's The aim is to amplify expectations. In addition, a look-ahead effect as a fixed effect in which either short opening or long opening is always executed in the look-ahead effect may be provided. With regard to the fixed effect, by making the mode different from the normal look-ahead effect, a sense of expectation can be further amplified for the player.

  In addition, in the case of a time-saving state, since the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the benefit of notifying the long opening is insufficient for the player, so the general drawing pre-reading effect is executed. It may not be done.

  Further, when the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, the execution of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display is being executed, it is permitted to execute the general figure look-ahead effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the background display is executed, if the probability state is low probability, the execution of the general figure look-ahead effect is permitted, and if the probability state is high probability, the general figure look-ahead effect is performed. Is regulated. This is because, in the special figure look-ahead production in the high probability state, there is a high expectation that the special lottery will be won, so that the effect of the general figure look-ahead production may be reduced. However, by performing the general-look-ahead effect, the player can be encouraged to continue firing without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special-aware-ahead effect is being performed. It may be executed. Further, the execution of the general-purpose look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the big hit gaming state, the execution of the general-purpose look-ahead effect may be restricted.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the pre-reading determination prohibition period has been reached (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processing of step S868 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the prefetch determination prohibition period has not elapsed (the result of step S852 is “no”), the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be prefetched are stored in the hit determination random number buffer in order to execute the prefetch determination. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in any of the ordinary symbol random number storage areas of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The normal symbol random number buffer is configured corresponding to the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, a 2-byte area of a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and is configured by a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls is 2 will be described. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are stored in a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer, respectively. Is stored. As described above, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, and the “normal symbol hit determination process” is performed on the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, thereby obtaining The determination and the hit determination at the start of the change can be performed by common processing.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the "normal symbol hit determination process", the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holdings are respectively a hit flag buffer, a normal symbol type area buffer. , Usually set / referenced in the symbol operation reserve ball count buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

  After clearing the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, the main control program sets ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data. A prefetch command for the normal symbol (corresponding to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the prefetch determination value is reset to permit prefetch (step S866).

  After the process of step S866 is completed, or in the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation reserved ball count command creation data 1 as the command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination value indicates that the prefetch is prohibited (step S870). If the prefetch determination value is not the prohibition, the result of step S870 is "no", that is, if the prefetch determination value indicates that the prefetch is permitted. In step S872, the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 2 is reset as command data. As described above, as the normal symbol operation pending ball number command, different commands are created when the prefetch is permitted and when the prefetch is prohibited. For example, different modes are set depending on whether the prefetch is permitted or prohibited. Lastly, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation reserved ball count command at the time of prefetching permission or at the time of prohibition of prefetching based on the command data set in the processing of step S868 or step S872 and sets the command in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol prefetching process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, a lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data table based on whether or not the game is in the time saving game state, and normal symbol hit lower limit data is set (step S902). In addition, the normal symbol has a high probability during the time reduction, and the number of hit values during the time reduction is larger than the number of hit values during the non-time reduction, so the values such as the lower limit are smaller values during the time reduction. (The total number of hit values increases). Further, the main control program tentatively sets the normal symbol winning determination value to the normal symbol no winning as a default value (step S904).

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the process of step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit set in the process of step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “yes”), the ordinary symbol lottery has not been won, and the ordinary symbol winning determination value provisionally set in the hit flag storage area (normal (No symbol winning) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of a loss, a hit value “0” (no normal symbol win) is set in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S906). S908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is determined that the game is out of place, as in the case where the ordinary figure lottery has not been won, and the hit flag area and the ordinary symbol type area are displayed. Each of them is set to "0" which is an outlier. In the same manner as in the case of the special figure, if the random number for hit determination is equal to or more than the lower limit of the hit determination, it may be determined that the hit is a hit. In order to cope with a malfunction in which an exceeded value is set, comparison is made with the upper limit.

  When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is “no”), the main control program determines that the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and determines the ordinary symbol winning determination value as the ordinary symbol winning determination value (“ 1 ") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the ordinary symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Further, a winning symbol random number is set as a comparison value (step S916), and a variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search processing to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the ordinary symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination processing, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. By setting in advance a different area in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area between the time of prefetching and the time of fluctuation, it is possible to share the processing between the time of prefetching and the time of fluctuation. More specifically, a hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area when the normal symbol starts to change, and a normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, a hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, the process can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation also in the normal lottery.

  The main processing related to the special lottery and the normal lottery executed in the main control board 4100 has been described above. The program for executing the game control according to the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, some modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and a part of the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process are extracted and shown.

  In the control program of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, each function is divided into modules. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 includes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process when starting a winning opening. It is configured to be used not only in the special symbol change waiting process and the like, but also in the ordinary symbol pre-reading process of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common module, a buffer, and the like at the time of command creation, regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Further, a process of searching for data (variation information number) from a predetermined table (variation information number search process) can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the configuration of a table to be searched and specifying a search range and a search parameter. By thus configuring the modules in common, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  The command buffer setting process and the change information number search process use a relatively small number of common modules. However, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a process such as a special symbol big hit determination is performed at the time of pre-reading ( (At the time of the start prize) and at the start of the fluctuation.

  More specifically, as described above, at the time of pre-reading (memory pre-reading processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation waiting processing), special symbol big hit determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28), The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to a value stored at a specified address, and by specifying a reference address before execution of the process, the values stored in different areas at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation Processing can be executed based on the value. Further, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if the present invention is applied to a process of referring to a different table according to a game state, a common process can be performed regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the normal lottery is also shared in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a hit flag indicating the result of the general symbol lottery is obtained from the hit flag storage area and the process is performed. Although the address is set, the address of the hit flag area is set as the reference address when the process is normally executed from the symbol change waiting process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share the above-described modules having a relatively large number of processes, thereby improving program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 44 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control section 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control section 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 4100 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in sound source VDP 4160a to write, for example, “0” to a storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms), ms), and if the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to make a hot start. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. To start cold.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d also compares the effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM). At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (ie, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power supply control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment unit). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a to a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) when power supply is started by the power supply control unit. The threshold is also updated.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the luminance of the LED included in the acquired luminance setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to turn on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value of this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset peripheral control MPU 4150a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, first, the value 1 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided is created and set by a lamp data creation process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the head address of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  Whenever a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers this (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data. This causes the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa to use the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150caa is stored in the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai one byte at a time. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing the data to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. At 4150cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 4150cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port occurs, triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the buffer becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When no bus is used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad in units of 1 byte. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Of the dial operating unit 401 (for example, the rotation direction (rotation direction) created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) The history information and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 are set. On the basis of the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It monitors the presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 and determines the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401. Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the display data creation processing described later is used by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a from the channels CH1 and CH2 to display the game board side liquid crystal. It outputs to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Thus, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called dropped frame occurs, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and A speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and a speaker shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the effects by music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects from speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs serialized sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. It is played back in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of emission data from the top emission data is changed to the emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a among the sound command data.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in a time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data specified by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the production control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception unit) described later (command analysis unit). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols held (0 to 4). , A symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of starting suspensions changes, and each time a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103. The special winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) or the frame state 1 command (the second error occurrence command and the full tank error occurrence command) indicating the full state shown in FIG. By analyzing whether or not there is (command analysis means), it is recognized which game state is currently at play. In addition, this production control program is configured such that after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door frame opening command or a door frame closing command. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. As the various commands, various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 various commands classified in tuning effect related, various commands classified in big hit related, and power-on are classified. Various commands, various commands classified in the ordinary figure synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the ordinary electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display shown in FIG. 16, and the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clear navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to tests, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for executing the notification, are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of turning on the power, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (producing device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (producing device), lamp (producing device) to visually warn the outside, or use a pair of side speakers (producing device) to audibly externally. (Error reporting means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, illegal acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year, month, and year, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs an effect control process (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, a demo screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not being executed, or when a special figure synchronizing effect command is received, the progress of the special figure synchronizing effect is controlled. In addition, a jackpot game effect or the like is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs settings at the start of execution of the special figure pre-reading effect. The details of the special figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs general-purpose look-ahead effect control processing (step S1028). In the universal figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs setting at the time of starting execution of the universal figure pre-reading effect and controls the progress. The details of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and sets the light emission pointed to by the pointer out of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the data, the game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. Of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided Door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is created by extracting from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. Are set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creating process, the pointer control is updated in the scheduler updating process in step S1020, so that the effect control program is the data constituting the screen generation schedule data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and is arranged in chronological order. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and extracts the at least one extracted character data. And sprite data is generated from the internal VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer) for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, by displaying a video composed by superimposing a large number of material images on a background image in each frame in accordance with the progress of the game, an attempt is made to make it difficult for the player to run out of interest. Although it is required to execute display control so that a larger number of material images are included in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, including a large number of material images in each frame is, at first glance, a display. It seems like a heavy burden on control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of a frame including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program executes each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing the correspondence information in which the correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined in advance, when trying to display a predetermined frame of each frame, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and the rendering data is included in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and including other material images excluding the predetermined material image. It is generated and stored in a built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is played Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific background image data”) among a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame is: On a background image based on the specific background image data, at least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific sprite”) is to be arranged at an original position (hereinafter, “original arrangement position”). As represented by a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter, referred to as “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence association table (correspondence information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, etc. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) is displayed. Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (concealment release command) for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence relation associating table, each sprite (and each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame as a part of the correspondence information. Values are managed.

  In this correspondence relation associating table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, The correspondence between the at least one material image and a concealment release command for releasing the visual concealment state is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). The effect control program is configured to control the peripheral control MPU 4150a to display a predetermined frame in accordance with the result of a predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied. By referring to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and specified is specified (material image specifying means).

  Further, the production control program, when a desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, by referring to the correspondence information of the correspondence association table, specifies the concealment release command corresponding to the desired sprite, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instruction means). The concealment release command includes a sprite number capable of identifying a desired sprite whose concealment state is to be released in the predetermined frame (hereinafter, referred to as a “desired sprite number”). With the output of such a concealment release command, the display state flag of the name tag information, which was off as an initial state, is updated to be on. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes a drawing process.

  Here, when the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is operated as follows. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has not received the concealment release command, the display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame is kept concealed based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table Is generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the above concealment release command, it receives this concealment release command and informs that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included therein is updated to ON. As an opportunity, a desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data for releasing the specified secret state of the desired sprite into a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized, in the frame buffer. Thus, the effect control program can cause the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  By doing so, the effect control program does not need to finely manage which sprite groups can be represented in each frame when displaying the frames of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by controlling the peripheral control MPU 4150a to output the concealment release command, which is much simpler than the conventional display control. A frame that does not represent a sprite can be drawn. This makes it possible to simplify the display control of a frame including a large number of sprites and reduce the processing load.

  In addition, a configuration is employed in which the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by the effect control program) are linked by the above-described correspondence association table to manage the correspondence. Thus, the creation of the sprite data and the design of the effect control program can be completely separated independently of each other, and the design related to the display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, generally, sensitivity adjustment is performed as an initial process when power is turned on, and thereafter, many devices operate at the sensitivity. Even if the adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance depending on the subsequent game environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the effect control program further controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a to control the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). A function of outputting the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) for executing a display operation in a mode of prompting contact with the operation surface, and causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program uses the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 to prompt the operator to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact input means). Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting means). Next, when the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 receives the command, the effect control program (display control program under the control of the command) causes the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) to be touched with a finger based on the command. A screen prompting to touch is displayed on the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs a touch panel process (step S1031). In the touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on a contact detection signal as a detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detecting means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detection means) for detecting a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires coordinate values of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies a position represented by the coordinate values as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), The operation information including the initial position is obtained. The effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter, referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel processing, as a countermeasure to the above-mentioned concerns, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the above-described effect command (effect effect command), and then transmitted to the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and thereafter, is output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

  More specifically, the effect control program executes a special figure 1 tuning effect end command (see FIG. 15) when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses from the main control MPU 4100a as the predetermined timing. ) At the time when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the special symbol 2 or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed. 15), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the threshold value.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 contacts the touch panel 246. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, when the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, the contact determination stored in the control register 481a is performed based on the threshold setting command. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the use threshold. Specifically, upon receiving the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold value in a non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. If it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state. It is determined that the contact surface is in a contact state.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the above-mentioned contact surface based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 481 changes the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the determined contact determination threshold is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. (Calibration) For this reason, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command without the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the game is not always affected by the game and the touch panel 246 is not affected. The detection of the contact state can be set to an appropriate operation mode.

  As described above, the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect end command output when the variable display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the reception of the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and it is unlikely that the player has stopped playing the game and is in contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246. Timing can be exemplified. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible while the variation display of the special symbol that may execute the effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, and the variation display is completed. I have.

  In addition, as the timing at which the threshold setting command should be output, the general control synchronizing effect end command (see FIG. 15) transmitted by the effect control program from the main control MPU 4100 a when the normal symbol change time has elapsed is also provided. The timing may be a timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed from the reception.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of a capacitance type, is capable of storing a large number of game balls, and is provided on the upper plate 301 where static electricity is easily generated. Since the sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing in response to the change of the surrounding environment, it is erroneously detected that the change has occurred in the capacitance even if the change is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and selects the sound indicated by the pointer from the sound command data arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data. The instruction data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 levels from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for the substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for the substrate volume 6, and from the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume. Each volume is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is converted into the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the silence to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when the clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 may be used. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker becomes small, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is large). (Sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a wrongdoing by the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. In addition to copying and backing up, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad included in the target Bank 0 (1fr) The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 ( Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is peripheral-control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated. The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy to the Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously provided for each backup byte Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target every one frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in the existing Bank0 (SRAM), is used as effect backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the backup second area 4150dc Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM).

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) is designated by copying the backup first area 4150db to Bank2 (SRAM). From the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the head address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The backup second area 4150dc is continuously designated by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by the effect control program first setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and interrupting 1 ms in step S1010. .., And S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the processing (peripheral control section steady processing), the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit cannot perform the normal processing until the V blank signal is input and then the next V blank signal is input.

  As a result, in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit regular process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, the consistency between the effect progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 executes the effect control program under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a as shown in FIG. Is smaller than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33-th 1-ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1-ms timer interrupt process has been started, the effect control program remains in this routine. To end. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is assigned to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the number of times of 1 ms timer interrupt execution STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs a motor and solenoid drive process (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are arranged in time series. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program controls the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid driving process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is read. A driving signal to the dial driving motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the buffer becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller in units of 1 byte. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. In this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is constructed. Based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in a series, the drive to the motors and the solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is performed. The game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial drive I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data in the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the data is emptied. This causes the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa to use the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for the motor driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, dial operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 are created. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up The effect information (1 ms) stored in the 4150cah and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is used as effect backup information (1ms), and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 in the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the A controller 4150ac to the backup first area 4150cb in Bank2 (1ms) is designated, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and copies the contents to the backup second area 4150cc Bank4 (1ms). And From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), backup bytes (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc are continuously provided in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the first address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the effect of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since the routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, which triggers main peripheral serial data to be incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, a status is allocated as a first byte, a mode is allocated as a second byte, and a status and a mode are regarded as numerical values as a third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main serial data is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the third byte of the main serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  If the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode as the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value as the third byte of the main serial data is received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is under a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Has been determined. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The received command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are different from the received command storage area. 4150 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This “peripheral control unit reception ring buffer” is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data as the second byte of the main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. And the associated mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table according to the present embodiment. The fluctuation pattern table is a table that manages a special figure tuning effect pattern (variation pattern) executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the fluctuation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronizing effect includes effects such as the peripheral control board 4140 causing the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to change the display of a decorative pattern or display a character in response to the changing display game. In addition, effects such as operating a movable role, illuminating a light-emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting a sound from a speaker may be included during the change display of the decorative symbol. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous), and the like. Further, a variation pattern that extends over a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

  The story reach is an effect in which the decorative effect is in the reach mode and a specific effect according to the degree of expectation (the possibility of a big hit) of the running variable display game is executed one or more times. In the present embodiment, it is set such that the greater the number of times the specific effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. The specific effect may be executed before the occurrence of the reach, or may be executed only after the occurrence of the reach. In addition, the effect form of the specific effect includes, for example, effects such as screen display (cut-in) such as appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, audio output), operation of movable character, and light emission of a lamp. . In the same type of effect, a plurality of different effect modes according to the degree of expectation may be defined.

  The pseudo continuous fluctuation is an effect in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and the fluctuation is performed again. The temporary stop and the re-change are repeated one or more times. In the present embodiment, it is set such that the greater the number of stops, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit. When the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, an effect such as a character appearing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or the effect may be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. When reach occurs in the final fluctuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the type of reach in the final fluctuation may be defined together.

  The fluctuation pattern is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (hereinafter, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command are combined. (Special figure fluctuation pattern command) mode (effect pattern) and special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) This is selected based on the value (the result of the variable display game) set in the mode of “special symbol type command” together with the type command). In addition, one variation pattern may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a game state.

  The variation pattern table includes items such as a variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, the number of effects inserted (the number of scenarios), an effect selection pattern, and a re-lottery. “Variation pattern name” is a name for identifying a variation pattern. "Winning information" is a result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to a value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. In addition, a game state (for example, a “normal state”, a “probable change state”, or a “time reduction state”) may be used instead of the “winning information”.

  The “fluctuation time” corresponds to a fluctuation time (execution time of a fluctuation display game) in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the variation time may be changed according to the number of stored memories. For example, when the number of startup memories is large (for example, the number of startup memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be reduced. In addition, it is the same as the variation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same applies to the case where the fluctuation time is shortened.

  The “number of effect insertions” is the number of times a specific effect is executed during variable display in story reach, or the number of times a special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether the effect is executed at the time of temporary stop) in pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a candidate for a specific effect to be executed in the story reach, or for selecting an effect to be executed at the time of a temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, the effect selection pattern is set such that the higher the reliability variation pattern is, the easier it is to select a specific effect with high reliability. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  “Re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute a process of re-lotting a stopped special symbol after the change display of the special symbol ends. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Receive command analysis processing]
Subsequently, the received command analysis processing (the processing of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the reception command analysis processing according to the present embodiment.

  In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) to determine whether the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. It is determined (step S1401).

  Upon receiving a command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment generates a peripheral control section command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45). Are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order in which they are received.

  If a command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines that the command received in the earliest order from the main control board 4100 is the peripheral control unit reception ring. The data is read from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure changing pattern command (special figure 1 changing pattern command or special figure 2 changing pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that the command is a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation is performed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a special figure type command (a special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure type command). It is determined whether or not the symbol type command is a winning information command indicating “losing”, “specific jackpot”, and “non-specific jackpot” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). If it is determined that the command is the special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “Yes”), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the receiving command is received. The analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command instructs a special figure prefetch effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether the command is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 reservation number designation command (pre-reading is present, FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls) increases. As described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing a special figure prefetch effect, a special figure prefetch effect execution flag indicating execution of the special figure prefetch effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the processing of step S1407 is limited to the case where the read-out effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "pre-reading". In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "no pre-reading", "No" is determined. In addition, as the special figure pre-reading effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command instructing a special figure pre-reading effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (symbol type pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading, fluctuation type pre-reading). The determination of “Yes” may be made when all the commands for instructing the pre-reading of the special figure are received.

  Further, if the read-out effect command is a special figure pre-reading effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S1408), and executes the received command analysis process. To end. When the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, whether or not to execute the special figure pre-reading effect is determined. Make the necessary settings to execute the effect. The main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, if the read-out effect command is not a special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a general figure look-ahead effect command (normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The general figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of ordinary design operation pending balls increases. Further, the universal figure pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the universal figure lottery. When receiving the general figure pre-reading effect command, a general figure pre-reading effect flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect (normal figure pre-reading effect) is set. When the universal figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, in the universal figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, whether or not to execute the universal figure pre-reading effect is determined. Make the settings required to execute the effect. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the general-purpose look-ahead effect. In the case of a model that does not execute the ordinary figure prefetch effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the read-out effect command is not the general-purpose look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1409 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a process such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1409). S1411), and terminates the received command analysis processing.

  The command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, a special figure tuning effect end command (special figure 1 tuning effect end command or a special figure 1 When the result of the variable display game is a big hit, or when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, a variable state designation command for specifying a game state (probable change state, time saving state, normal game state) after the big hit game is ended included. When the special figure tuning effect end command is received, a tuning effect end flag is set. Also, according to the result of the variable display game, a jackpot opening command for instructing execution of an effect at the start of the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command for instructing execution of an effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included.

  Furthermore, when a game ball wins in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, a starting port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a starting port winning effect notifying that the game ball has won in the starting port is provided. Start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of special symbol 1 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the upper starting port 2101 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is mainly controlled. Received from the board 4100. Similarly, when the number of the special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the lower starting port 2102 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is mainly executed. Received from control board 4100.

  The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls). The display corresponding to the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

  Also, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a response is made by a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42). Execute the processing.

  Further, in addition to the above-described command, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, a power-off command is transmitted. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 is supplied with power for a predetermined time from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 even when power supply from the outside such as a pachinko island facility is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held and a command such as a power interruption command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 and the like. When the power supply from the outside is restarted, a power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, and is one of a decorative symbol change start process (step S1500), a decorative symbol change process (step S1600), and a big hit display process (step S1700). Is selectively performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the received command analysis process. Next, a process for starting a special figure synchronizing effect including a variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the hit information of the fluctuation display game, the effect contents (stop symbols of the decorative symbol, the type of the reach effect, determination of whether or not the advance effect is performed, the advance effect mode, presence / absence of the extended effect, etc.) are determined, Perform settings etc. according to the determined effect contents. In addition, the control is performed so that the demonstration effect is executed when the special figure entrainment effect is not executed. Details of the decoration symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol change process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the special display tuning effect (decorative display of decorative symbols) is started on the condition that the variable display game is started. The special figure synchronizing effect executed in synchronism is controlled. Further, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, a process for terminating the special figure tuning effect and stopping it for confirmation is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control from the start of the special figure entraining effect to the end thereof is performed. Details of the decorative design change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, upon receiving the special figure tuning effect ending command, the effect control program terminates the decoration symbol based on the result of the variable display game in order to end the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variable display of the decorative symbol. Finally, the effect control program sets a processing selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, if the result of the variable display game is "big hit", the processing selection flag is set to [2], and if the result of the variable display game is "losing", the processing selection flag is set to [0]. Set.

  Until the special figure synchronizing effect ending condition is satisfied, the special figure synchronizing effect is continued. For example, the effect control program switches a scene (video) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or changes a character. Performing effects such as making them appear. In addition, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that indicates the result of the fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later is executed.

  In the big hit display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48), the big hit On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, the display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 indicating that the special winning opening 2003 is opened, or the display during the big hit game state (for example, round display, etc.) ). At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decoration design change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol change start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol change start process according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol change start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the change pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1404). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the main control board 4100 waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition). . Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the fluctuation display game is started), the control for the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous display effect such as the symbol change (step S1511). Step S1512). If the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), a demonstration effect display flag for starting the demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set (step S1513).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and sets the variation pattern reception flag. (A result of step S1501 is “Yes”) or a predetermined time has elapsed (a result of step S1512 is “Yes”), and the process waits until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues to execute the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special figure design type command, an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the production control program updates the processing selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol change start process is executed only once at the start of execution of the special figure entrained effect.

[10-9. Direction setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronized effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag is set and the parameter is set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, based on the current game state (for example, an effect mode related to only the effect mode such as a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probable change time reduction state, a normal game state, etc.) A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of a game state may be provided in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a fluctuation pattern having a different effect form may be defined for each game state.

  Then, the effect control program sets an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the specified variation pattern is a story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result of step S1521 is "Yes"), a story reach setting process for setting data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the production control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). If it is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1522 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process for setting data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing an effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, a continuous look-ahead effect setting process for executing a continuous look-ahead effect in which the effect content can be set independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous look-ahead effect setting process, if it is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process of step S1027 of FIG. I do. The details of the continuous prefetching effect setting process will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is definitely displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. The effect pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to indicate the result of the variable display, a specific character is made to appear, or the background color is set to a color different from the normal color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is definitely displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol tuning effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process is completed, information necessary for executing the special figure synchronized effect is set. Then, the lamp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the lamp data creation process (step S1028), and the display data of the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42) By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, a special figure synchronizing effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern is started.

[10-10. Decoration pattern change processing]
Next, the decorative symbol changing process (step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol changing process according to the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol change process is executed when the decorative symbol change start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. Then, in the decorative symbol change process, the special figure synchronized effect executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on condition that the special figure synchronized effect (variable display of the decorative symbol) has been started.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for terminating the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, the condition for terminating the special figure synchronized effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect, for example, when a special figure synchronizing effect end command (symbol confirmation command) is received from the main control board 4100, the special figure synchronizing effect may be ended, or the special figure synchronizing effect may be ended. The special figure tuning effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. In addition, both the reception of the special figure tuning production end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure tuning production may be used as the end condition of the special figure tuning production, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure tuning production. Even if it is not, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so that the variable display is forcibly terminated and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.

  When the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), the effect control program stops (fixes and stops) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command ( Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). More specifically, if the result of the variable display game is "out", the process selection flag is set to "0", and if the result is "big hit", the process selection flag is set to "2". If there is "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

  On the other hand, when the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, when the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is continued, the effect control program first sets the variation pattern. It is determined whether the type is story reach (step S1604). If the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), story reach control processing for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, the scenario effects executed in the story reach are all selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process). Is selected. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation state of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and the control according to the operation state is executed. Just fine.

  If the type of the variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the type of the variation pattern is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). If the type of the fluctuation pattern is the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1604 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process for controlling the progress of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, when the type of the variation pattern is not the pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is "No"), the effect control program executes a special figure tuning effect control process corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach (step S1605). Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. In addition, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of a fluctuation display game to be executed next or later may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, the present process ends.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. ) Is determined (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In step S1304, when the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suppressed, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time period during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, a command backup process is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the Bank2 (1fr) and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated as the request factors of the control DMA controller 4150ac to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. By specifying a copy, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Is specified in the received command storage area 4150cac included in the Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in the Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the contents stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in succession.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 42 is started again.

  As described above, if the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314, and the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state is entered. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled without continuing in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312 and the WDT clear processing is not performed, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[11. Story reach]
Subsequently, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the special control tuning effect is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol change display (change display game) on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, in the special figure synchronized production, a production (specific production) that indicates the degree of expectation of the fluctuation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or more than once (insertion). Is done.

  Further, in the effect relating to the story reach, the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the reach effect or after the reach effect. In the present embodiment, the specific effect in the story reach is executed after the occurrence of the reach. Hereinafter, an effect when story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach setting process according to the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, a process related to setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing will be described. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as described above, the description is omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number and the effect selection pattern from the fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probable change state, normal state) of the variable display game or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). Further, the number of selected effects indicating the number (counter) of the specific effects set in this process is set to the initial value (“0”) (step S1532). Subsequently, a specific effect scenario is selected by the number of effect insertions (step S1533 to step S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effects executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effect executed first is finally selected.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of inserted effects, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). If the number of selected effects is less than the number of effect insertions (result of step S1533 is “No”), a process for selecting a scenario (step S1534 to step S1538) because a specific effect for which a scenario has not been selected remains. Execute

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure for selecting the specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when the story reach is executed, a specific effect of any one of the scenarios 1 to 6 is executed, and an expectation degree at which the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit in the order of the scenarios 1 to 6 ( (Probability) is set to be high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario having a high degree of expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenarios 5 and 6 with relatively high expectations are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenarios 1 and 2 with relatively low expectations are selected. Is set not to be.

  Further, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value obtained in the process of step S1534 in FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selectivity of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

  Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state in which the probability of winning the special symbol change display is high, a scenario having a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the player's expectation may be further increased. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-described gaming state, the number of times of performing a fluctuation display based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, the number of times of executing an SP reach), or a big prize in a big hit game. It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

  A random number for selecting a specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range from “0” to “1000”). For this reason, when a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected after a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected (falling down), there is a possibility that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, a case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern will be described. Pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is three. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario corresponding to the specific effect executed first is “scenario 2”, the scenario executed next is “scenario 3”, and the scenario executed last is “scenario 1”. In this case, the specific effect performed after the second specific effect (“scenario 3”) is “scenario 1” having a relatively low degree of expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the degree of expectation of the running variable display game corresponds to “Scenario 1” or “Scenario 3”, and the reliability of the story reach as a notice effect is impaired. There is a risk that it will.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, the above-described falling is prevented from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating changes in the random number extraction range in the present embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects are sequentially selected from the specific effect executed last. When “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (the number of inserted effects 3), first, the last (third) specific effect is executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, a random value is extracted in a range (prescribed range) from 0 to 1000 (FIG. 55 (A)). If the random number value extracted at this time is “550”, “scenario 3” is selected with reference to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. Then, the effect control program stores the identification information of the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (Step S1536). Information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit) of random numbers extracted to select the second specific effect to be executed (step S1538). As described above, “scenario 3” is selected in the specific effect executed last, so if “scenario 4” is selected in the specific effect executed second, a fall will occur. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the random number generation range is set so that only “scenario 1” to “scenario 3” are selected instead of the specified range of 0 to 1000. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit “600” is the upper limit at which “scenario 3” is selected. By setting the upper limit to “600”, “scenario 4” is prevented from being selected. In FIG. 55 (B), the range indicated by the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range indicated by the broken line (range from “600” to “1000”) indicates that random numbers cannot be extracted. It is possible range.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random value for selecting the second specific effect to be executed, “scenario 2” is selected as the specific effect scenario. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random value to “200” so that “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” in which the specific effect executed first does not fall down is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “85” is extracted as a random number, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55C).

  Then, the value of the number of selected effects is 3 in the processing of step S1538, and the value of the number of selected effects matches the value of the number of inserted effects, so that the result of the processing of step S1533 is “Yes”, and the effect control program End the selection of the effect. Finally, the range (upper limit) of the changed random number is set to a specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process ends.

  In the procedure of the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers is set at the time of start of change (effect control process → decorative symbol change start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at another timing. A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (when the execution of the specific effect is started), all the scenarios of the specific effect may be selected. In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command, a pre-reading effect-related command, or the like transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the change to the execution of the specific effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the effect variation. Note that, if the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the occurrence of the reach, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  Further, at the timing of selecting the specific effect, the random number of the number corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when random number values are extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), and “550” (scenario) The specific effects may be executed in the order of 3).

  Further, a random number may be randomly selected each time the specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of a specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit value of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, it is set so that the effect with a high degree of expectation is executed as the random number value is large. And reset the lower limit. Specifically, when Scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit value is set to “100” so that a fall does not occur when the next specific effect is selected. To be generated. By performing such control, story reach can be executed in the same manner as when a specific effect is selected at the start of a change or the like. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is retained and used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronized effect) ends. In addition, a more specific procedure will be described in the control in the pseudo continuous effect described later.

  Further, both the lower limit and the upper limit may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”, only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” can be selected. Further, by setting the lower limit value to “101” and the upper limit value to “200”, “Scenario 2” can always be selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed for a case where all the specific effects are selected at the start of the change. Further, in the effect selection pattern table, items such as setting only the upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and lower limit value may be provided so as to be settable for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit is not “0”, a random number from “0” to “lower limit−upper limit” may be generated, and the lower limit may be added to the extracted random number. For example, when the lower limit is “101” and the upper limit is “200”, a random number from “0” to “99 (= lower limit−upper limit)” is generated, and the lower limit “101” is added. The result may be a random number extracted.

[11-2. Production example]
Through the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect to be executed in the story reach so that a fall does not occur. Next, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect performed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing after a reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative design 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911. In a region 1912, words corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed are displayed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario (line) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, the high degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is shown. Specifically, in Scenario 1, words indicating that the degree of expectation is low are displayed (“no good !!”), and the words are sequentially set so as to increase the sense of expectation. In Scenario 5, a line indicating a big hit ("Hit?") Is set, and in Scenario 6, a line indicating a big hit has been set ("Big hit ~!"). Note that scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit has been determined.

  Next, the screen transition of the story reach will be described. FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 are diagrams illustrating an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 change pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a special figure synchronizing effect with a change display of a decorative symbol is started. Further, since the story reach is selected as the variation pattern, the reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

  After that, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect in which words (scenario 2) are displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), a scenario 3 having a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the generation range of the random number is not adjusted, in the specific effect executed last, as shown in the screen (E-1), the specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the specific effect executed previously is displayed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the fall, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the specific effect executed before is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected in order from the specific effect that is executed last. Therefore, when scenario 1 is selected last, scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same degree of expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not executed continuously.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative pattern are executed once or more in the special figure synchronizing effect, and selected at a predetermined timing by lottery. An effect based on the performed scenario is executed. In the effect based on the scenario, as in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of the running variable display game is executed.

  The temporary stop of the decorative symbol is a state in which the change of the decorative symbol is recognized by the player as if it has stopped, but is actually continuing. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops last is a state in which the middle symbol slightly moves up and down, and re-change starts from this state.

  In addition, regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The change display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be changed again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may include the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and a different result mode may be obtained only by the difference of the fourth symbol. With this configuration, the winning game is executed by making a part of the result mode of the big hit and the result mode of the small hit similar to each other, so that the game state after the end of the hit game (the winning probability of the variable display game and the like). Can be hardly recognized by the player, and the variation of the effect can be increased.

  In the story reach according to the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the change are determined. However, in the pseudo continuous change according to the present embodiment, the scenarios are randomly selected and selected at the timing of executing the specific effect (scenario effect). . Also, in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, when reach occurs in the last re- fluctuation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed even if pseudo continuous fluctuation does not occur may be executed. Alternatively, a reach effect that is executed only in the case of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be used. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is not necessary to generate the reach in the last fluctuation. Hereinafter, description will be given of an effect when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation setting processing]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as described above, the effect content is selected by lottery immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation, an initial setting necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the quasi-continuous fluctuation setting process shown in FIG. 60, a description will be given of a process related to the setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as the case where the selection is made, the description is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number (the number of temporary stops) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551). Store in a predetermined area.

  Further, the effect control program sets the effect insertion number as an initial value to the remaining effect number which is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, a specified value is set to initialize a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a specific effect scenario (step S1553). In the present embodiment, at the time of executing a scenario effect, the effect contents are selected by lottery and are sequentially selected from the scenario effect to be executed first. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of the random number for scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set to limit the selected scenario.

  Note that, similarly to the case of the story mode, all scenarios may be randomly selected in the pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of the variation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing]
Next, a description will be given of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process executed in the decorative symbol fluctuation process. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo-continuous fluctuation control process is executed between the start and the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and controls the execution of a temporary stop and the execution of a scenario effect in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect of the present embodiment, the operation input reception period of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is set in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, A scenario effect is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, a normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is in a state in which the operation input can be accepted in order to execute a scenario effect. That is, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set, a process for executing a scenario effect is executed.

  If the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether it is time to accept the operation of the press operation unit 405. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process ends.

  If it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (result of step S1646 is “Yes”), it indicates that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (press operation). The setting for executing the effect (requesting the operation of the unit 405) is made (step S1647). Further, the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is set (step S1648), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process ends. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step S1631). S1632). The pressing operation section operation flag is set when the pressing operation section 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is obtained in the operation unit information obtaining process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is set in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit power supply (FIG. 42). ) Are set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit regular process in (1).

  If the pressing operation section operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value within the set upper limit value and lower limit value range (step S1633). Furthermore, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is obtained from the effect pattern table based on the obtained random number value (step S1634). The format of the effect pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario having a low degree of expectation is easily selected.

  When a scenario is selected, the effect control program executes a scenario execution setting process for setting effect information related to image data, sound data, and the like necessary to execute an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. (Step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is obtained by executing a ramp data creation process (step S1028), a display data creation process (step S1030), and a sound data creation process (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit regular process. An effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  Thereafter, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of the random number value for selecting the scenario to be executed next based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1633 so that the effect content does not fall. It is set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower degree of expectation than the scenario selected in the processing of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario at least of the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the obtained random number is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit to “301”, a scenario having an expected degree equal to or higher than the scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. In addition, by setting the lower limit value to “501” instead of “301”, it is possible to set the lower limit value so as to always be satisfied.

  On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the effect control program determines that the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer times out. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1638). If the time has not expired (the result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo continuous effect control process ends, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, if the time of the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer has expired (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processing from step S1640 is executed.

  When the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is received during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, or when the time is up without receiving the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, The effect control program ends the press operation unit operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the press operation section operation acceptability flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining effect number is decremented by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the production control program determines whether the remaining production number has become 0 (step S1643). If the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), the last specific effect has been executed, so the upper limit of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. The processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the time during which the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted in order to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

  As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer is not timed up and the pressing operation unit operation receivable flag is set, a specific effect is produced. It is controlled to be executed. The effect based on the scenario (specific effect) may be executed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the time of the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer expires, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The unit operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Production example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Subsequently, an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol before the reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started a predetermined time before the decorative symbol temporarily stops (the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is ready to be received), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is provided at the timing of the temporary stop. The process ends (the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 cannot be accepted). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be received (a period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be received), after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, until the re-change of the identification symbol is started. During the period, a specific effect is executed.

  The specific effect is similar to the story reach, and when the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911. In a region 1912, words corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed are displayed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect in the pseudo-continuous variation of the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 change pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special figure synchronizing effect with a change display of a decorative symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 63 (A), a left symbol and a right symbol are arranged in this order. The decorative pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the press operation unit operation acceptable period is reached, and a press operation unit suggestion effect prompting the operation of the press operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed is stopped as the middle symbol, and thereafter, the figure is displayed. As shown in FIG. 63 (D), a specific effect is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and similarly to FIG. 63 (B), a press operation unit suggestion effect is started (FIG. 63 (F)). At this time, if the pressing operation section 405 is not operated, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (G)), the re-change starts without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63 (H)). Thereafter, when the final decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (I)), a reach effect is executed (FIG. 63 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (J), the executable SP reach 3 is executed even when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not executed, but the reach executed at this time may be an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous production. Good. Also, the press operation unit suggestion effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the execution of the specific effect.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the re-change starts without executing the specific effect. It may be executed.

[12-4. Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are diagrams illustrating the timing of controlling the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64A shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the period in which the pressing operation unit operation can be received.

  First, at time t10, a game ball wins in the starting ports 2101 and 2102, and a special symbol is changed on the main control board 4100 (a special symbol (identifying symbol) on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186). (Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command, a special figure design type command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect.

  When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (start of the special figure synchronizing effect), the reception period of the operation input of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 at the timing before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (press operation unit operation reception) (Possible period) is started, and the press operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). The press operation unit operation acceptable period continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is selected by lottery (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (the timing at which the decoration symbol re-change starts, time t14). Execute a specific effect based on the scenario.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop ends, a reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the change of the decorative symbol ends in synchronization with the end of the change display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the fixed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Next, a case will be described in which the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period. FIG. 64B illustrates a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of the time t12, the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is not executed. In the specific effect executed at the timing of the time t15, since the lower limit value of the random number is not reset, all of the candidate scenarios can be selected.

  Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modified example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C illustrates a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the period in which the pressing operation unit operation can be received.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of the re-change of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, a specific effect is executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a specific effect at a timing operated by the player, and to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is not executed and the operation is skipped, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period that occurs thereafter. , A specific effect for the skipped portion is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 65 (D), a case where the press operation unit 405 is operated in the third press operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the press operation unit 405 during the second press operation unit operation acceptable period is illustrated. Is shown. In this case, the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped, but at the third temporary stop, the skipped specific effect is also executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), the specific effect based on the scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect including the skipped portion is selected. After the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production according to the present embodiment, the range (lower limit) of the random number for selecting the subsequent specific production is set based on the random number obtained by randomly selecting the preceding specific production, so that the execution is performed in advance. It is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect having an expected degree lower than the expected degree of the specified effect is executed.

  Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the intention of the player.

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Modification of Scenario Selection Timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation described above, the operation period of the pressing operation unit is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and a scenario for executing the specific effect at the timing when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is selected. Was. On the other hand, a case will be described in which, as in the story reach described above, all the scenarios for executing the specific effect are selected at the start of the change.

  When all the scenarios are selected at the start of the change, in the pseudo continuous change setting process (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), the steps from step S1533 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) are performed. The same processing as in S1538 is executed. With this configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in a state where all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect have been set.

  As described above, when all scenarios have been determined at the start of the change, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect that has not been performed is restricted (skip). May be. In this case, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, a re-lottery may be executed to select a scenario again. In addition, it is also possible to skip without performing a specific effect that is regulated without executing a re-lottery, to execute a specific effect that has been set in advance, or to specify based on a scenario that has been canceled by canceling the restriction. An effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the last specific effect is executed, even if the specific effect that should be executed in the middle is regulated, in order to notify the player of the final expectation degree, A specific effect based on the determined scenario may be executed.

  Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[12-5-2. Modification of specific effect execution condition]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405. However, the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions include, for example, a symbol that is determined and stopped, and a combination of symbols that does not appear at the time of a loss, in the case of stopping at a so-called chance, executing a specific effect without operating the pressing operation unit 405. (At this time, it is not necessary to request the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Further, the specific effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination including the symbol dedicated to the pseudo-sequence that appears only when the pseudo-sequence is temporarily stopped, not at the chance. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be the pseudo-sequence exclusive symbol, but any symbol in the displayed symbol row may be stopped at the pseudo-sequence exclusive symbol. In addition, a specific effect may be executed when the game is stopped at a symbol at the time of a normal loss (a so-called loss eye).

  Also, the timing of execution of the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable character) operates, a predetermined light-emitting body (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Is also good.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right. For example, a specific effect may be executed when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing. Moreover, you may make it change the mode of production according to the rotation direction of a dial.

  As another operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick may be arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 and a specific effect may be executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

  Furthermore, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470 so that a player can perform an operation input from the touch panel, and a specific effect can be executed by operating the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470. Good. Further, in the touch panel, in order to enable various inputs, not only the selection of the specific effect, but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

  Not only the above-mentioned contact-type operation means but also a non-contact-type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the specific effect may be executed by the player performing an operation such as holding his hand in front of the game board.

[13. Special figure look-ahead production]
Next, a look-ahead effect that indicates the result of the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol is started will be described. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is a normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and a predetermined timing before the start-up memory targeted for the pre-reading effect is consumed. And a continuous look-ahead effect in which the degree of expectation of the variable display is suggested.

  In the normal prefetch effect, for example, a hold display of the start memory to be prefetched is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in the continuous prefetching effect, each time the start memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed, the form of the suspension display of the start memory to be prefetched is changed. In addition, not only the mode of the hold display of the start memory may be changed, but also a specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous change may be executed at a timing at which the mode of the hold display is changed.

[13-1. Special figure pre-reading effect control processing]
First, the special figure pre-reading effect control processing (step S1027) of the peripheral control section regular processing in the peripheral control section power-on processing (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure pre-reading effect control process according to the present embodiment. In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect and a process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect are executed. The special figure pre-reading effect control process may be executed when a pre-reading effect command is received in the received command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the prefetch effect effect flag is set (step S2001). As described above, when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the prefetching effect is not executed, and the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program performs a normal look-ahead effect based on the contents of the look-ahead effect command corresponding to the start memory of the object to be prefetched. Is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal look-ahead effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start-up memory of the look-ahead target.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. Normally, in the pre-reading effect, when a game ball wins in the starting opening, the state of the hold display is changed regardless of the progress of the change display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of held start memories is 0. It is changed at a predetermined ratio.

  When the look-ahead effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”, but when the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from “white” to a big hit according to the degree of expectation. With the probability (FIG. 67), the colors change to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the suspended display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a loss.

  When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal look-ahead effect setting process of performing setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal pre-reading effect setting processing, the setting for changing the display color of the hold display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory is performed at the timing of the change. Thereafter, the pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of normal prefetch effects from being executed for one start memory.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the continuous prefetching effect is executed only when the normal prefetching effect is executed. That is, the player has a sense of expectation by the normal prefetching effect at the timing when the game ball has won the starting port, and has a greater sense of expectation when the mode of the hold display is further changed by the progress of the game. In addition, you may make it execute a continuous look-ahead effect without performing the normal look-ahead effect, for example, when the number of reserved starting memories is large, execute the continuous look-ahead effect without executing the normal look-ahead effect. You may do so. In particular, the present invention is effective when the upper starting port and the lower starting port can always be awarded, and the starting ports can be alternately awarded, and up to eight starting memories can be held.

  The effect control program determines whether or not a normal prefetch effect has been executed (step S2005). If the normal look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is "No"), that is, if the color of the hold display does not change to "white", the special figure look-ahead is executed without executing the continuous look-ahead effect. The effect control processing ends.

  In the case of executing the normal look-ahead effect (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program uses the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (based on various information included in the look-ahead effect command received from the main control board 4100). The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 67) (step S2006), and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern and hit information. In addition, the starting memory number (the number of special symbol operation reserved balls) is included in the special symbol storage command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start storages is three or more because the manner of the hold display changes over a plurality of fluctuations. Further, when the result of the fluctuation display based on the start memory is a big hit (or a high possibility of a big hit), it is set so that the continuous prefetching effect is easily executed and the number of continuous prefetching is easily increased. .

  In addition, the lottery of whether to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007) is performed based on the continuous prefetching effect execution probability. In addition, it is set so that the continuous prefetching effect is not executed when no reach occurs in the start memory of the prefetching target.

  When a continuous look-ahead effect is executed (result of step S2007 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets an effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous prefetching effects is set to the number of remaining effects (the number of remaining prefetching) (step S2009).

  Further, the effect control program sets a range of random numbers (upper limit and lower limit) for selecting a continuous look-ahead effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

[13-2. Continuous prefetching effect setting processing]
Next, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol changing process will be described. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is a process of controlling a look-ahead effect for a start memory that is a target of the look-ahead effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed at the timing when the start memory in which the variable display game is executed prior to the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed. Execute the processing.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous prefetching effect setting process according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 66) when the continuous look-ahead effect is executed. If the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous prefetch effect process is terminated because the continuous prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random value for selecting a look-ahead effect to be executed (specific effect) ( Step S2102). Further, based on the obtained random value, the specific effect mode is obtained from the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table (FIG. 70) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings for executing a continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) are performed.

  In the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous look-ahead effect is executed in the state where the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the shape is controlled so that the shape changes in a state where the color of the hold display changes. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting a hold display mode in the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 2”, when the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect is 1, when the random number value is 201 to 400, the specific effect is 2,. Is selected for the special effect 6.

  In pattern 1, specific effects 5 and 6 with high expectations are not selected. In pattern 1, all specific effects are executable. The range of random numbers is set so that the effect is not easily selected. On the other hand, in pattern 4, specific effects 1 with a low degree of expectation are not selected, and specific effects 4 and 5 with a high degree of expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 68, pattern 1 is selected with a fluctuation pattern having a low degree of expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  If the same shape as the previously executed continuous pre-reading effect is selected, the game may be allowed to proceed as if the continuous pre-reading effect was not executed, or the hold display may temporarily flash. For example, the player may be notified that the continuous prefetching effect has been performed.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is performed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the remaining effect number (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all consecutive prefetch effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). If the number of remaining effects has become 0 (the result of step S2106 is “Yes”), the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107) because all the continuous prefetching effects have been executed. Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous prefetch effect setting processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is “No”), that is, if all the continuous look-ahead effects have not been executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102 Is set on the basis of (step S2109). For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the random number value is “350”, the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, Is set, the lower limit of the random number is set to the lower limit “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected. Thereby, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, the random number value in the range of “201” to “1000” is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the random number value is compared with the effect executed earlier in the continuous look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent an effect with a low degree of expectation from being executed.

  In the continuous prefetching effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the suspended display changes stepwise. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of consecutive prefetch executions is “3”, the lower limit value is set to “0” and the upper limit value is set to “1” so that the specific effect executed first is 1 to 4. 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect executed second time is set to “201” and the upper limit value is set to “800”. That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. In this way, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation is always increased (increased), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is performed in the next (last) specific effect. Is selected, and a specific effect can be executed so as to prevent a fall and to surely increase the degree of expectation. In addition, if it is set so as to be surely established, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of the player. Therefore, the control may be performed such that it is surely established only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Production example]
By the above processing, a specific effect can be selected such that a fall-off does not occur in the continuous pre-reading effect. Next, a specific example of the continuous prefetching effect will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of the continuous prefetching effect according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 71 (A) shows a state in which the decorative display is displayed in a state where the pre-reading effect has not been executed. FIG. 71 (B) shows a state in which a normal prefetch effect has been executed as a result of a game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 in the state of FIG. 71 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the reserved start-up memory is exhausted, and the next fluctuation display is started. At this time, the first continuous look-ahead effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) to 71 (G), each time the held start memory is exhausted and the variable display is started, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed, and the shape of the hold display is changed. Change.

  Then, when the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 71 (H)), a reach occurs (FIG. 71 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 71 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the progress of the game (the effect mode is changed), so that the player's sense of expectation is further increased in the process of continuing the game. Becomes possible. In particular, for a variable display game executed after a prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect) is executed at the timing when a game ball wins at the starting port, the starting memory targeted for the prefetching effect is consumed. Although the entertainment interest may be reduced, the state of the hold display changes each time the variable display game is executed, so that the player's expectation can be continuously increased, and the entertainment interest is reduced. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure pre-reading effect control]
Note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetching effect and the continuous prefetching effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (the continuous look-ahead effect), At the time of digestion, the mode (shape) of the hold display changes. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect only at the timing when the game ball wins at the starting port, and the content of the specific effect (change of the hold display) is randomly selected at the time of holding the game.

  On the other hand, the contents (scenarios) of all the specific effects may be randomly selected at the time of the start winning, as in story reach. For example, in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 66), all the specific effects are randomly selected. In the processing (step S1408) of setting the look-ahead effect execution flag in the reception command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be randomly selected.

  In addition, when the number of retained storages is 2 or less and the variable display is being executed at the time of the start winning, the number of continuous prefetching effects is set to 1, and when the number of retained storages is 3 or more, the continuous prefetching effect lottery table ( What is necessary is just to select the mode of the continuous prefetch effect based on FIG. 68) (all the patterns may be covered by the continuous prefetch effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (usually the same as the look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, when the number of pre-reading effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of the start winning and thereafter, the mode of the hold display does not change, a gaseous effect with a very low expectation may be performed. That is, the greater the number of changes in the hold mode, the higher the degree of expectation of the jackpot, but if only one time, the degree of expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special map 2 priority digest]
In the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101, a first special figure variable display game in which a special symbol is variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185, and a gaming ball is won in the lower starting port 2102. In this case, the second special figure change display game in which the special design is variably displayed on the lower special design display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started in a case where a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102, in preference to a case where a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101. Therefore, when a prefetching effect is executed based on the starting memory in which the game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the game ball has won in the lower starting port 2102, the digestion of the starting memory of the prefetching effect target is delayed. Become.

  In this manner, when the variable display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. In addition, a specific effect based on the selected scenario may be executed, and the specific effect executed last may be continuously executed by the interrupted amount.

  Alternatively, the scenario may be re-selected for the interrupted amount. At this time, a random number range may be set according to the scenario corresponding to the specific effect that has been executed, and a new scenario may be selected, or the executed scenario may be ignored, so that the content of the effect does not fall. Alternatively, a scenario may be newly selected by initializing the range of random numbers.

  Furthermore, when a game ball wins in the lower starting port 2102, the specific effect may not be executed but only the variable display corresponding to the starting memory that has won the upper starting port 2101 may be executed.

  When the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are configured to be simultaneously executable, for example, a specific effect is performed in accordance with the execution of the first special figure change display game. You just need to do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is won, the starting ball solenoid 2105 is driven to open and close the movable piece 2106, so that a game ball can be won in the lower starting glass 2102. However, if the game ball wins alternately in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 and the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are executed alternately, an interrupt is issued. Does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variable display game is executed. However, since the variable display for up to eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished, A series of specific effects over a period can be executed, and effects with more variations can be executed.

[13-4-3. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed. However, the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a specially-structured structure or natural object may be arranged behind a decorative pattern or a character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Modification of random number lottery]
In the effect example described above, the range in which random numbers are generated (upper limit value, lower limit value) is changed so as to prevent falling, but other methods may be used to prevent falling. Good. The case where pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

  For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, while keeping the range of “0” to “1000”), a specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by a process such as an operation. May be. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. To explain such an example, in order to prevent falling, it is set so that a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “600”. Here, a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “1000”, and a multiplication by “600/1000” is performed (rounded down to the decimal point) to generate a random number in a range from “0” to “600”. be able to.

  Also, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range from “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as a random number value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the random numbers are unevenly distributed. For example, if the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range (Here, 600−400 = 200) is added to the random number value (that is, the overlapping range is changed from “200” to “600”), so that a scenario having a high degree of expectation is likely to be executed. Then, the player's sense of expectation may be increased.

  As yet another example, when generating a random number in a range from “0” to “1000”, a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” is generated ten times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number in the range from “0” to “1000”. With this configuration, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of the actually generated random numbers constant by setting and adding the number of random numbers generated according to the range of the generated random numbers. it can. Further, instead of generating the random number a predetermined number of times, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number. For example, a random number in a range from “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” by ten. Although fine distribution is not possible, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. Further, the method of extracting random numbers may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the extracted random numbers may be adjusted as needed.

  Further, after extracting a random number for selecting a specific effect to be executed first, a random number for selecting a subsequent specific effect may be added to a random number for selecting a preceding specific effect. . At this time, the generation range of the random numbers may be adjusted so that the random number value after the addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be truncated.

[15. Allowance for falling (rule break)
[15-1. Production example]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect that is continuously executed is configured so that the degree of expectation of the effect content can be prevented from falling. However, even if the fall does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is executed first, the flow of the subsequent effects is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game cannot be enhanced.

  Therefore, a modification will be described in which a fall is allowed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a change is made to a normally executed effect pattern. The condition for allowing the falling may be determined, for example, according to a gaming state such as a probability state of a winning probability of a variable display or an operating state (hours saving state) of the ordinary electric auditors. Specifically, if the probability of the result of the fluctuation display being a big hit is high (high-probability state, probable change state), or if it is in a state advantageous to the player such as a time saving state, the generation range of the random number is not adjusted. May be allowed to fall. Conversely, in a state that is not advantageous to the player other than the probability change state or the time saving state, a fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

  Further, only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the fall may be allowed. In other words, the player can recognize that the big hit is decided when the effect with the low degree of expectation is performed and the player is disappointed. As described above, when an effect that is not executed in the normal flow is executed, the expectation is increased. Conversely, the effect variation can be increased and the interest of the game can be increased. The fall may be allowed (with a low probability) during normal operation while controlling the fall to be less likely to occur, and the probability of the fall occurring when the result of the variable display game is a big hit may be increased.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the fall is permitted according to the variation pattern instead of the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after the pseudo continuous production) is generated, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. As described above, instead of the result of the variable display game, whether or not the fall is allowed may be made to correspond to the effect content.

  Further, a fall in the reliability of the fluctuation pattern when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit may be allowed. For example, the setting is made such that the variation pattern (reach) with high reliability has a higher possibility of falling down than the case where the variation pattern (reach) with low reliability is selected. Conversely, a variation pattern (reach) with a low reliability may be more likely to cause a fall than a variation pattern (reach) with a high reliability.

  Also, if the probability state of the variable display game is in the obscure mode that does not clearly indicate whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probable change state after the jackpot game has been completed, a random number is used only when the actual probability state is the normal state. May be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is the probable state, even if a fall occurs, the probability of winning the variable display game is high, so that the player is less likely to be discouraged. As a result, the discouragement of the player due to the production of the story reach is reduced. Conversely, only in the case of the probable change state, the generation range of the random number may be adjusted to prevent falling. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the occurrence of the fall.

  Further, in the ambiguity mode, the probability state may be explicitly reported when the falling-down occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Further, two types of modes, that is, a mode in which the generation range of the random number is adjusted to the unclear mode and a mode in which the generation range of the random number is not adjusted may be settable. Further, these modes may be selectable by a player. With this configuration, the player can select whether to be able to recognize the probability state early or to perform an effect with less disappointment.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, control for allowing falling will be described. In the present embodiment, the generation range of random numbers is adjusted in order to prevent falling, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, when falling is allowed, the upper limit or lower limit of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the fall does not occur. However, when the fall is generated as the jackpot notification effect, the range of the random number may be set so as to always generate the fall. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set so as to be returned to a predetermined step instead of the predetermined value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the falling probability and the stage.

  As described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by generating random numbers in a predetermined range in an overlapping manner. In this case, the falling probability (rising) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range to a range in which falling occurs, or conversely, a range in which rising occurs. Further, the range of the generated random number may be adjusted by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter.

  As described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing). However, the numerical value to be added may be changed according to the game state. For example, 1 is added in the normal game state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probable change state). By changing the updating method of the random number counter in this manner, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of falling down according to the gaming state.

[16. Power-off processing]
Here, a description will be given of a process performed when a power-off command or a power-on command is received in the reception command analysis process.

  As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted when power supply from the outside to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Before the power interruption command is transmitted, as described above, a power failure notice signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is executed to execute processing such as command backup. Is executed.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the mode in which the power is turned off. Specifically, when power supply from the outside is stopped and power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, power supply to only the main control board 4100 is cut off. In this case, the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 may be interrupted. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is powered off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to a wiring contact failure or the like, the game control in the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c has not been lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, as described above, the hot start is performed. The effect control is resumed (continued).

  Even when the production control is restarted by the hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply has been temporarily cut off. For example, the power supply cutoff may be displayed by displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on, or by displaying a screen notifying that the power has been cut off.

  Further, the interruption of the power supply may cause a difference between the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of the change of the display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the change of the display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 is shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when the special figure tuning effect end command is received. If it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of the change, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be any symbol other than the big hit, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

  In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing when the big winning opening closing display command or the ending command indicating the shift to the next round is received.

  When the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c has been lost, the value 0 is written to a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the production control is restarted as a cold start.

  If an effect (variation pattern) accompanied by a specific effect is being executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of a hot start, the effect may be continued as long as the progress information of the specific effect is held, or the result of the lottery of the scenario may be discarded and the scenario may be re-selected. When drawing a scenario at the time of execution of each specific production, draw a scenario to execute the subsequent specific production until the timing when all final specific productions are completed so that the contents of each specific production do not conflict. Instead, the specific effect may not be executed. Note that the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply of the peripheral control board is shut off regardless of the cold start or the hot start.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power cut command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display when power is turned off (an abnormality notification screen). Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is restarted, a command for notifying the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. Note that the command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

  When the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the currently executed effect, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect is performed so that the player does not mistakenly recognize the effect. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect being executed is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed or a round effect during a big hit game. The effect that the player does not misunderstand is, for example, when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, all the decorative symbols are fluctuated and displayed at a high speed, or a specially designed decorative pattern is displayed. If a big hit game is being played, only the big hit game need be displayed without displaying the number of rounds.

  Further, if the game state is different from the display state during the current production, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. It should be noted that the abnormality notification screen may be any display as long as the player can recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, if the fluctuation display is being executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation or story reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is ongoing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery) ) Is aborted.

[16-3. When the power to the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off]
When the power to the gaming machine is cut off, power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from a backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are retained for a predetermined period. As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied to the gaming machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, a game state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and if the game is not in a game stop state such as a customer waiting state, the peripheral control board 4140 gives an effect of notifying that power shutoff has occurred. Is executed, the production is switched to an effect that does not give a false recognition to a player waiting for a customer. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. In this case, if the fluctuation display is performed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continued, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery). ) Is aborted.

[16-4. Summary at power-off]
With the above configuration, even if the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether the execution of the variation display in the pseudo continuous variation or the variation pattern of the story reach is continued. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

[17. Directed look-ahead direction]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetching effect (general symbol prefetching effect) will be described. In this embodiment, when a normal symbol type prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, a general symbol prefetch effect is executed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a general-purpose prefetching effect control process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

  When the general-drawing pre-reading effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the general-purpose pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received. If the ordinary figure pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program ends this process because the ordinary figure pre-fetching effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the general figure pre-reading effect is currently being executed (step S2201). S2202). If the general-purpose look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the processes in and after step S2207 are executed in order to continue the general-purpose look-ahead effect being executed.

  When the general-drawing prefetching effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition of the general-purpose prefetching effect is satisfied (step S2203). The execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is determined, for example, according to a game state or the execution status of another effect, and the like. In the case where the execution condition of the universal figure pre-reading effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for executing the general-purpose look-ahead effect is not particularly limited. For example, you may make it perform independently of the execution state of the fluctuation | variation display (special figure synchronized production) of the decoration symbol corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is being variably displayed, a general-purpose look-ahead effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Further, the execution timing of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 73, even during the execution of the special figure prefetching effect, the general figure prefetching effect may be executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command) instructing execution of the pre-reading effect is received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect, etc.) is being executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the general-purpose look-ahead effect, the execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is set. As unsuccessful, the execution of the ordinary figure prefetching effect may be restricted. Also, in order to prevent a plurality of types of announcement effects from being executed at the same time, when the prefetch announcement effect of the special lottery is executed, the processing of the prefetch announcement effect of the ordinary lottery is regulated by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Is also good.

  In the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), a star-shaped pre-reading effect area having a star shape is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen, and the symbols are variably displayed in the area ( FIG. 73 (C)). Then, as a result of the fluctuation display, the symbol corresponding to the hit ("this", FIG. 73 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the loss ("-", FIG. 73 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the general drawing lottery is displayed. Is notified. The player may fire the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the ordinary figure pre-reading effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit stops, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102. At this time, in order to secure a time for the player to aim at the lower starting port 2102 and fire, the effect control program determines whether the result of the general drawing pre-reading effect is given a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the ordinary lottery, the general mode is set in accordance with the advantage for the player (easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting port 2102). You may determine whether the execution conditions of the figure look-ahead effect were satisfied. For example, as a movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is set to increase. At this time, only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player, such as long release, the general-purpose look-ahead notice may be executed.

  In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than a hit and a loss may be defined, and a stop symbol may be set according to the degree of expectation that a normal lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. If the movable piece 2106 moves in the long opening mode as a result of the regular drawing lottery winning, a stop symbol that informs as a hit is set. May be a stop symbol.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, it is not necessary to execute the ordinary symbol type prefetch effect. This is because the winning probability is high, and even if the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, the profit for the player is small, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short. That is, it may be determined whether or not the general-purpose look-ahead effect can be executed according to the game state.

  If the execution condition of the general-purpose prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the general-purpose prefetching effect region (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variably displaying the symbols in the universal figure prefetching effect, the general figure prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the universal figure prefetching effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the ordinary figure pre-reading effect timer times out may be fixed, may be in accordance with the game state, may be in accordance with the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, or may be a combination thereof.

  Furthermore, when the general-drawing pre-reading effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the rendering control program determines whether or not the general-purpose pre-reading effect timer has expired (step S2207). If the general-purpose prefetching effect timer has not expired (the result of step S2207 is “no”), the process ends because the general-purpose prefetching effect is continued.

  On the other hand, when the general-drawing prefetching effect timer times out (the result of step S2207 is “Yes”), the rendering control program stops and displays the changing symbol in order to display the pre-reading result of the general-drawing lottery ( Step S2208). Finally, the ordinary figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and the process ends.

  In addition, the general drawing pre-reading effect described above is executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, the general look-ahead effect is not only displayed on the display device, but also executed on multiple effect devices such as operating movable movable objects, illuminating luminous bodies such as lamps, outputting sounds from speakers, etc. It may be possible, or a combination of these plurality of effect devices may be used. When performing a pre-reading effect in combination with a plurality of directing devices, besides executing simultaneously with multiple directing devices, the pre-reading directing effect should be executed on one of the directing devices out of a plurality of directing devices. You may. For example, when performing a pre-reading effect by screen display and voice output, a state in which the pre-reading effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, during error notification, when another (pre-reading) effect is being executed, etc. In the case of ()), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the general-purpose look-ahead effect by voice output is executed. Also, instead of restricting the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, the general-purpose prefetching effect may be performed so as to overlap with the other effects. In this case, the effect form of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made translucent to perform a pre-reading effect for ordinary drawing, or the volume may be reduced to output audio.

[18. Effects etc.]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the range of the random number value dynamically according to the game state and the like, it is possible to execute a continuous effect without inconsistency, such as preventing falling without complicating the control. can do.

  Further, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during execution of an effect including a specific effect, a flag for executing the specific effect and a random number initial value are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the effect, and the effect cannot be continued.

  In addition, when there is a starting prize that generates a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the effect, or when there is a starting prize that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectation), Even when the condition for shifting the state (game mode) is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variable display based on the game ball winning in the lower starting port 2102 described above is executed in preference to the case where the game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101, the result of the variable display executed preferentially is When the initialization condition such as a big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being interrupted due to occurrence of an event such as occurrence of a big hit or a change in a game state, and restarting in an incomplete state.

  In addition, the present invention may be applied to not only preventing the falling-down but also performing an effect that is executed continuously and has an order.

  For example, the present invention may be applied to a case where an effect for each round is selected in a big hit game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect content may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every three rounds in a 15 round big hit game). In addition, a common effect may be executed up to an intermediate round (for example, 7 out of 15 rounds), and the effect content may be selected for subsequent rounds (for example, after 8 rounds). At this time, for example, if the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes a start memory that becomes a big hit, an effect pattern in which a special effect is easily executed is selected, and a continuous big hit is selected. A certain fact may be suggested (notified) to the player.

  As described above, the feature of the present invention is that, by dynamically changing the range of the random number value according to the game state and the like, it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating the control. Become.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to hold a preview lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of a specific effect in the story reach, the pseudo continuous variation, and the continuous prefetching effect, so that the storage capacity increases with the diversification of the effect. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special map look-ahead (judgment / production)]
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetch determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetch effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on main control board side (prohibition of special figure pre-reading determination)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are examples of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 74 is an example of a table showing a modification of the command “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 tuning effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 tuning effect related” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as described above is omitted.

  The starting opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect. Here, if a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower starting port is set based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to “02H”.

  Next, in the above-mentioned (FIG. 16), the timing at which the number of special symbol 1 reservations has changed (the timing of increasing the number of reservations (the number of stored memories) due to a game ball prize to the upper starting port 2101 or the timing at which the upper special symbol display 1185 The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the timing of decreasing the number of holdings due to the fluctuation display, and when the number of special symbol 1 holdings increases (when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port 2101), the special symbol is used. The 1-number-of-holds designation command has been sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values “00H” to “04H” are set accordingly. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies the presence / absence of a prefetch effect as well as the hold number at the time of increase. The special symbol 1 hold number designation command indicates “pre-reading” information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1”, and “non-pre-reading” information when the upper bits of the mode value are “0”. Represents. And when the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is "pre-reading", it also plays the role of instructing the start of pre-reading effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 74), the command transmitted differs when the number of special symbol 1 reservations decreases (at the start of fluctuation) and increases (at the time of starting opening winning). The special symbol 1 storage command at the start of the change indicating the number of reserved balls at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 reserved decreases (the timing of the decrease in the number of reserves by the variable display on the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, at the start timing of the variable display. Is sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command at the start of fluctuation transmitted when the number of holdings is reduced has 0 to 3 pieces of holding number information, and the mode values “01H” to “04H” are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 is increased (timing of increasing the number of retained symbols by winning the game ball to the upper starting port 2101), a prefetched special symbol 1 memory prefetch command indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence / absence of prefetching is transmitted. You. Therefore, the prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command transmitted when the number of reservations is increased has 1 to 4 pieces of reservation number information, and the mode values “* 2H” to “* 5H” are set accordingly. The upper four bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” when “prefetching is not performed” and “1” when “prefetching is performed”. The setting of the presence / absence information of the pre-reading is performed in the process of step S242 (“no pre-reading”) and the process of step S280 (“pre-reading is present”) of the storage pre-reading process (FIG. 76) described later. The pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the status value and mode value constituting the command are not set. different. Note that the special symbol 2 storage command at the start of change and the special symbol 2 prefetch command at the time of pre-reading have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Also, only when there is prefetching (that is, when the leading address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command at prefetching is “1”), the symbol type prefetching command, the variation pattern prefetching command, and the variation type A prefetch command is sent. In the modified example, a fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting the transmission of the variable distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76, a storage prefetch process according to a modification will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. Note that processes common to the above-described storage prefetching process (FIG. 24) are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, when the pre-reading determination is made, the fluctuation distribution table information pre-read command is transmitted. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). At this time, the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command acquired in the process of step S284 is a special symbol storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching of the corresponding special figure (FIG. 74). As described above, the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

  Returning to FIG. The symbol type prefetch command is determined based on the result of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory prefetch process (FIG. 76). This is a command to specify a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the results of the special symbol big hit determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of the change. There are special figure 1 (2) symbol type commands as commands for specifying outliers, specific jackpots, and non-specific jackpots. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  Loss or big hit symbol types 0 to 48 are associated with the mode values of the symbol type prefetch command (FIG. 74) and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 75). For the pattern type prefetch command, the mode value “01H” is set for the loss, the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for the symbol types for the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and the non-specific The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, the mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each of the symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the non-specific jackpot (small hit). .

  The variation pattern prefetch command is a command for specifying an effect pattern (variation pattern) as described above. The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by changing the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (steps S258, FIGS. 29 and 30) of the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76). It is set using. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set an effect mode from a plurality, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed effect content (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

  The fluctuation type prefetch command is a command for designating information (added value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous fluctuation with respect to the set fluctuation pattern. The added value of the time is set using the random number for the variation type in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 76). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation is not performed by the variation type random number, the variation time of the set variation pattern is maintained. If it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation is performed by the random number for the variation type, the pseudo random number corresponding to the variation type (one of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern is determined by the random number for the variation type. The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the added value of time is associated with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the added value of time is set by determining the number of executions for each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

  The fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command is a command for specifying the fluctuation distribution table used when determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of the fluctuation. As described above, in the fluctuation distribution table, the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit ("yes" in step S350) is out of reach but a reach effect is performed (step S350). The reach fluctuation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372) and the deviation fluctuation selection information table (“no” in step S372) used when no reach effect is performed (step S372). Non-reach sorting table). The fluctuation distribution table at the start of the fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach sorting table has a hold (startup memory) having a reach determination random number that may change the reach determination result as to whether or not to perform a reach effect when the number of pending balls changes between the time of pre-reading and the start of fluctuation. ) Is a table set for).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a merit of transmitting the variable distribution table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands. FIG. 77 is an example of a simplified flowchart that simplifies (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table, and (B) changes the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of the reach execution availability table.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination processing, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination random number, and if a jackpot is determined, a jackpot distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order, the reach determination is performed using the reach determination random number. In the reach determination, a reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and when the value of the reach determination random number is larger than the comparison value, the reach reach table is set. Is set. After that, the effect mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the effect mode.

  In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold) varies according to the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and the comparative value is incremented by 10 every time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the result of the reach determination differs depending on the number of retained balls, so that either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach sorting table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Therefore, the mode value of the fluctuation sorting table information look-ahead command is “01H” when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, “02H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 in the case of a big hit, and the reach determination random number. Is set to “03H” when the number is 10 to 49, and “04H” is set when the reach determination random number is 50 or more.

  As described above, by transmitting the fluctuation distribution table information pre-read command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of pre-reading, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation with respect to the hold of the mode value “03H”. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of the reach determination may differ when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. If the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is “03H” in the storage prefetch process (FIG. 76), the process of setting the hold command reference value when there is prefetch in step S280 is not performed. The state in which the pending command reference value at the time of no prefetching in S242 is set may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch determination, but does not transmit the prefetch determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, a special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command of "no prefetch" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the look-ahead effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when a game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101 (lower starting port 2102) is held. Information on whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (“prefetch” or “no prefetch”) is included together with the ball count information. Then, only in the case of "pre-reading", the symbol type pre-reading command, the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command, the fluctuation type pre-reading command and the fluctuation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and in the case of "no pre-reading", these pre-reading commands are not transmitted. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted at the time of the start winning, and does not wait for the reception of another look-ahead command. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an execution target. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, when receiving a special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of "prefetching is present" (when receiving specific game information), receives another prefetch command or a prefetch effect. After executing the process of setting the execution flag (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) and establishing the execution condition of the prefetch effect (first pre-process), the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 42) Step S1027, second preprocessing) is executed, and a prefetch effect is executed. Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command of “no prefetching” (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command), the peripheral control MPU 4150a can recognize that the prefetch command is not transmitted later. Can be immediately determined without waiting for the reception of the pre-reading command (not setting the pre-reading effect execution flag). That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 66), which is the second pre-processing, without executing the first pre-processing, and the pre-reading effect execution flag is set. Since there is no prefetch effect (“No” in step S2001), the special figure prefetch effect control process ends without executing the prefetch effect.

  If the main control board 4100 does not perform the pre-reading determination (if a “no pre-reading” command is received), the peripheral control board 4140 needs commands (symbol type pre-reading command, fluctuation Since the pattern prefetch command, the fluctuation type prefetch command, and the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning (prefetch) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch effect. Such erroneous control can be prevented beforehand. In addition, as described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit information on presence / absence of prefetching to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure in prefetching performance that can occur in the progress of the game, so that an appropriate prefetching effect can be obtained. Implementation can be facilitated. Note that the condition for setting “no prefetching” in the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command (that is, the condition that the main control board 4100 prohibits prefetching) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  The symbol type look-ahead command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning (pre-reading) has a mode value different for each specific big hit type in a specific big hit (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A non-specific big hit (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit without operation of the device, is set to a common mode value regardless of the type of the non-specific big hit. That is, when the pre-read determination result is a specific jackpot (first specific result), the main control board 4100 transmits a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific jackpot can be specified. If the prefetch determination result is a non-specified jackpot (second specified result), a command (second specified information) whose mode value is unified so that the type of non-specified jackpot cannot be specified is transmitted. Then, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, a different mode value is set for each of the non-specific big hits and the non-specific big hits. As a result, the type of the small hit, which is a so-called non-special big hit, cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the change. There is no risk of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  For example, a large winning opening is opened upon a small hit, and a V zone winning structure of two kinds of blades in which a big hit occurs by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening is provided. In pachinko machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area differs depending on the type of small hit. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit can be derived according to the type of the small hit. In addition, since the type of the big hit that is derived according to the type of the small hit is different, the privilege (the number of times of working hours reduction, etc.) that the player can acquire is different. For this reason, the small hit type information becomes more important for the player. If a pre-reading effect capable of grasping the type of the small hit is performed in such a pachinko machine, the player performs a separate hit according to the type of the small hit, and can easily aim at the big hit or a specific privilege. Therefore, by preventing the pre-reading effect according to the small hit type from being executed, no predictable element (information) is given to the player until the change is started. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Prohibition condition of prefetch judgment]
FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing conditions for prohibiting prefetching by the main control board 4100 according to the modification (A), and is a diagram for explaining an effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of transition to the state (B).

  In the above-mentioned memory prefetching process (FIG. 76), when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the timing of the starting winning of the game ball and the timing at which the fluctuation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or If the table does not change and the prefetch determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the prefetch determination is prohibited. Then, when the prefetch determination is prohibited, “no prefetch” is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of starting winning is the probability at the start of the variation. The state may be different from the state, or the time saving state at the time of the start winning may change to the non-time saving state at the start of the change, and the like. (Number of games) falls within four times. In this case, the prefetch determination is prohibited regardless of the type of the special symbol.

  When the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the game state when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 2101 is the time reduction state or the operation of the condition device. This shows a case in which the game state is a big hitting game state, or a case where the game state when a game ball is won to the lower starting port (starting port in special figure 2) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hitting game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball winning (occurrence of the special symbol 2 holding) to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is limited to the time saving state, the lower starting port (special figure 2). If the game state when the game ball is awarded to the (starting port) 2102 is a non-time saving state (a state not a time saving state), the prefetch determination is prohibited. In addition, even if the pre-reading determination is performed for the special symbol hold generated during the big hit game, the special (low) probability state and the non-saving time state are set during the big hit game irrespective of the previous game state. There is a high possibility that the game state is different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the prefetch determination may be reduced. For this reason, even when the gaming state to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 when a game ball is won (when a special symbol is held) is a big hit game, the prefetch determination is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B triggered by 100 times of the fluctuation digestion, at the timing when the number of times the state A is maintained (the number of remaining fluctuations) becomes four (97 in the state A). At the time of the start of the second change), the prefetch determination is prohibited. Then, the period from the transition from the state A to the state B is defined as a prefetch determination inhibition period.

  Winning 1 that occurred immediately before the start of the 97th change in the state A is exhausted as the 97th change if there is no hold in all of the hold memories 1 to 4, but the hold is stored in the hold memories 1 to 3. If there is, it is stored as the second to fourth hold in the hold storage 2 to 4 areas, respectively. And it is digested as the 98th to 100th variation. If a hold is stored in all of the hold storage areas 1 to 4, an overflow prize is won and no storage is made.

  In this way, the prize 1 is changed in the state A even when the change finishes slowly. If there is no state transition between the prize and the start of the change, the pre-read information (big hit determination result, change pattern, etc.) determined at the time of the prize is not different from the change information determined at the start of the change. However, the prize 2 that occurs after the prize 1, that is, after the start of the 97th change in the state A, may change between the state at the time of the prize and the start of the change depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of the prize occurrence. . When the number of reserved balls at the time of winning 2 is three, and winning 2 is stored as the fourth holding in the holding storage 4 area, even if the winning is in the state A, at the start of the change, the state B is in the state B It becomes. In this case, since the pre-read information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of the variation have different states premised on various determinations, they may not be the same. In particular, when the state A is a state more advantageous to the player than the state B, in spite of the fact that a high expectation effect was performed in the prefetching effect based on the prefetching information, the fluctuation actually has a low expectation value, An event may occur that greatly discourages the player.

  Therefore, a period during which a state transition may occur between the time of winning and the start of change depending on the number of balls retained at the time of winning, that is, from the start of the 97th change in state A to the 100th change, and the state changes from state A to state. The pre-reading is prohibited during the period before shifting to B. In this way, the prefetch effect is not performed when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed is the predetermined period (here, the number of remaining maintenance times of the state is 4 variations). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the prefetching effect that is excessive (deviation) compared to the actual fluctuation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the prefetching effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  The state transition includes transition from a high-probability state to a normal-probability state by digestion of ST times, transition from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by digestion of time-saving times, and state transition by an effect mode transition according to the number of changes. Can be If it is possible that the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the winning (the pre-reading) and the start of the variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the pre-reading determination and wins the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening and the information without pre-reading are transmitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a performs such read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition, so that, for example, when a power failure occurs during a time-saving state and power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally determines the number of remaining time-saving times. Since it is not possible, after the power is restored, the forbidden look-ahead effect can be executed. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern differs between the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state. The number of times of change (the number of time savings) in the time saving state is counted by the main control MPU 4100a, but the information on the number of time savings is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information of the time saving state, but cannot grasp the progress of the time saving state (remaining number of time savings). For this reason, if the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less, even if an attempt is made to prohibit the pre-reading effect, the determination cannot be made, and the time saving state ends after power is restored. Until then, I had to prohibit the look-ahead production. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform the pre-reading determination when the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less (a predetermined number of times). It is not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform a prefetch effect. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the look-ahead effect during the time reduction state in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power is restored during the time reduction state and the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period in which the prefetching effect is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the description of the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command (FIGS. 74 and 77), when the mode value is “03H”, the result of the reach determination is that if the number of reserved balls fluctuates between the time of the pre-read and the time of the fluctuation start. It was mentioned above that the table may be different, ie the table for selecting the variation pattern may be changed. Whether or not there is a possibility that the table for selecting the variation pattern may change according to the result of the reach determination can be determined based on the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probabilities are determined in advance, these values can be obtained without setting the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command by prefetch determination. In such a case, before executing the prefetching determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 76), it may be determined whether or not to perform the prefetching. When there is a possibility that either the reach or the non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the tables for selecting the variation patterns are different (“yes” in step 244).

  Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold, and each of the pachinko machines 1 can hold and store up to four upper limit pieces. Prefetching is prohibited when the remaining number is four or less, but is not limited to this. The number of determination thresholds (here, four times) may be changed according to the specifications applied to the pachinko machine 1. The above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch determination performed on the main control board side may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special figure prefetching effect)]
Next, a control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

  In the above description, the special figure read-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described. However, the pre-read prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not enough to prevent the occurrence of a problem related to the pre-reading effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers power from a power failure, the main control MPU 4100a can grasp the power restoration time information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot. When the suspension is present at the time of the power interruption, the main control MPU 4100a transmits the information on the number of reserved balls to the peripheral control board 4140. However, the pre-read information (the result information, the variation pattern, etc.) Command contents). Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the look-ahead effect with respect to the suspension at the time of the power failure which has been in the suspension state at the time of the power failure. In addition, the pre-read information for the suspension generated after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a. However, there is a concern about the execution of the pre-reading effect of the suspension generated after the power recovery until all the suspensions at the time of the power failure are consumed.

  For example, when the probability state after power restoration is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes a suspension to become a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs a prefetch determination of the suspension that occurred after the power restoration. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state due to the execution of the corresponding pending change. That is, when the suspension generated after the restoration of the power is exhausted, it is in the low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold that occurred after the power restoration is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, and the player's expectation may be greatly disappointed. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetching effect even after receiving the special figure prefetching command until the predetermined number of times (eight times) of the fluctuation start after the power is turned on including the power recovery. The predetermined number is the upper limit of the number of special symbols 1 and the number of special symbols 2 held. Further, as described above, the prefetch effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received prefetch variation distribution table information command is “03H”. In the following, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the first modification will be described.

  Further, as a second modification, if there is an unknown hold at power-on (hold at power interruption), the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetch effect even if it receives the special figure prefetch command until the unknown hold is exhausted. I do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives not only the gaming state but also the special pattern 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching of "no prefetching", the suspension of the command is treated as unknown suspension, and similarly, In this case, the look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 84, the pre-reading effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Modification Example 1 (Pre-reading of predetermined number of changes is prohibited at power-on)]
First, Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the first modification. Note that the same processes as those of the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 48) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch inhibition count process in the received command analysis process according to the first modification.

  As described above, in the received command analysis processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit receiving ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and processing according to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a post-input eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag and a flag corresponding to other commands ( Step S1422), and terminates the received command analysis processing. After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (instruction of production start and game state) according to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, after power-on, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 is the power-on state command.

  If the read command is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a prefetch inhibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the prefetch inhibition count processing will be described with reference to FIG. The look-ahead prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started to be executed eight times after the power is turned on, even when receiving a special figure look-ahead command.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the post-input 8 fluctuation prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set to the subtraction-type prefetch inhibition count provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). After that, the post-insertion 8 variable prefetch prohibition flag is released (step S1433). As a result, the setting of the pre-reading prohibition count is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after power-on.

  If the post-insertion eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag is not set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to the process in step S1434 described later.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is updated by subtracting 1 (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch inhibition count processing ends.

  The description will be given along the passage of time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → Step S1432 → Step S1433 is executed at the start of the first change in step S1431, and a prefetch inhibition count for counting the number of changes after the power is turned on is set. Thereafter, in step S1434, No → the processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “7”. Thereafter, at the start of the second variation, the processing of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → the processing of step S1435 is performed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “6”. Similar processing is repeated at the start of the third to eighth fluctuations, and at the start of the eighth fluctuation, the prefetch inhibition count becomes “0”. Therefore, when the fluctuation starts thereafter, the process of No in step S1431 and the process of Yes in step S1434 are repeated.

  As described above, in the prefetch prohibition count process, the value of the prefetch prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after power-on are linked and linked, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the state is the prefetch prohibition state from the value of the prefetch prohibition count. .

  It returns to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the read command is a special figure pre-reading effect command (a pre-reading special pre-read special design 1 (2) storage pre-read command, a pre-read design type pre-read command, a pre-read variation pattern pre-read command, a pre-read variation type pre-read command). If the command is a pre-reading variation distribution table information command (Yes in step S1407), an ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) with a status value of “69H” and a mode value of “03H” is used as the special figure pre-reading effect command. Is determined (step S1441). If the ambiguous command has been received (Yes in step S1441), the pre-reading effect is not executed, and the received command analysis process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the pre-reading prohibition count is not counted. It is determined whether it is “0” (step S1442). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), the fluctuation has not been started eight times after the power is turned on (prefetch prohibition state), so that the prefetch effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends.

  In addition, when the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs execution of the prefetch effect because the start of the eight changes after the power is turned on has been completed. The figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis processing ends. When the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control according to the first modification, the prefetch effect is not performed until the predetermined number of times of change, which is the upper limit number of suspensions, is executed after the power is turned on. For this reason, the suspension at the time of the power failure does not affect the prefetch effect of the suspension occurring after the power recovery. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-described problem, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set as the total upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the look-ahead effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of power interruption is surely exhausted (change start).

  Although the pre-reading effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on due to the power recovery from the power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing the RAM clear on the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 sends a command that distinguishes both, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two for simplicity of processing. However, prohibiting the pre-reading effect until the time of clearing the RAM in which no problem occurs may also cause a decrease in the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is being cleared, and if the RAM is being cleared, a prefetch effect may be permitted. By canceling the unnecessary look-ahead effect prohibition in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

  For example, when the probability state after power restoration is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes a suspension to become a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs a prefetch determination of the suspension that occurred after the power restoration. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state due to the execution of the corresponding pending change. That is, when the suspension generated after the restoration of the power is exhausted, it is in the low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold that occurred after the power restoration is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, and the player's expectation may be greatly disappointed. There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (read-ahead prohibited until unknown pending digestion)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the second modification. Note that the same processes as those of the received command analysis process of the first modification (FIG. 79) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing in the received command analysis processing according to the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the power-on hold (power-off hold) of the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as “unknown hold” in which the look-ahead information for executing the look-ahead effect is unknown. Then, the prefetching effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted.

  With reference to FIG. 81, the received command analysis processing of the second modification will be described. First, when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a read-ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown suspension setting. The processing is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the closing unknown flag setting process (step S1450) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the special figure 1 reserved number (unknown reserved number) and the special 2 reserved number (unknown reserved number) in the subtraction method special 1 unknown count and special 2 unknown count provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery after power failure, the number of suspensions at power failure is set as power recovery information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special unknown count is “0” (Step S1452). If the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), a special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of the prefetching effect of special 1 reservation is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. I do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power failure, or that it is an initial start, not a power recovery. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set extra unknown count is “0” (Step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1454), a special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of the prefetching effect of special 2 suspension is set (step S1455), and an input unknown flag setting process is performed. To end. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply, or it is not power recovery but initial startup. Therefore, the flag is not set, and the input unknown flag setting process ends.

  As described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the pre-reading effect prohibition setting (unknown flag setting) is performed for each special symbol based on the presence or absence of the unknown suspension according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a suspension at the time of a power failure, a look-ahead effect prohibition setting of a special symbol to be held at the time of the power failure is performed.

  Referring back to FIG.

  Next, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460). After that, the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process for determining whether or not to cancel the prefetching (clear the unknown flag) by exhausting the unknown suspension. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol of the fluctuation start target is subtracted, the digestion determination of the unknown reservation (judgment of cancellation of prohibition effect prohibition) is performed, and when the digestion is completed, the unknown flag (prohibition of prohibition effect) is cancelled. .

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). If the unknown flag of the target special map is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

  On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special map is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special map by 1 (step S1462), and updates the target special map. It is determined whether the unknown count in the figure is “0” (step S1463). If the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process ends.

  As described above, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is consumed (the number of balls held when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating the presence or absence of the unknown hold is linked. When the value of “.” Becomes “0”, the unknown flag is released. This makes it possible to determine from the state of the unknown flag whether or not the prefetching is prohibited in the special figure prefetching execution determination process (step S1470 in FIG. 81, FIG. 84) described later, and to determine whether or not to execute the held prefetching effect that has occurred. Have to be able to.

  Referring back to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the suspension at the time of power interruption but also the suspension when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as “unknown reservation”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of the unknown suspension (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) is performed not only at the time of power-on but also at the time of power-on (the game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102). This is also performed when a command is received.

  If the command read in the process of step S1402 is a prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command indicating the number of balls to be retained at the time of starting opening winning and the presence or absence of the prefetch information of the generated suspension, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines ( In step S1469, a special figure prefetch execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure pre-reading execution determination processing, the setting of an unknown flag for each special symbol (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of the pre-reading information of the received command, and the execution of the pre-reading effect according to the state of the pre-reading information and the unknown flag Set flags.

  Here, the details of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is a special symbol 1 command (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether the command is "pre-read" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the head of the mode value of the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “1”.

  If the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is not “pre-ready” (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads other pre-read commands (pre-read symbol type pre-read command, pre-read variation pattern). Since the pre-reading command, the pre-reading fluctuation type pre-reading command, and the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command) are unknown pending that are not transmitted from the main control board 4100, a special 1 unknown flag for prohibiting the special 1 pre-reading effect is set (step S1473a). At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at prefetching is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the setting state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the process of rewriting the value of the special 1 unknown count to a new value of the number of reserved balls in the process of step S1474a. Do. It is updated so that the digestion of the new unknown reservation in the memory order is always a condition for canceling the look-ahead effect.

  On the other hand, when the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “pre-read” (Yes in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits another pre-read command from the main control board 4100. Then, it is determined whether or not “6903H” (ambiguous command) has been received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 79) of the first modification. If the ambiguous command has been received, that is, if the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of “6903H” has been received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure pre-reading execution determination process ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of a mode value other than “03H” (No in step S1475a), It is determined whether the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), execution of the special 1 prefetch effect is prohibited, and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends.

  When the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is permitted, so that the special figure prefetching effect of instructing the execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is performed. The flag is set (step S1478a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends. When the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 66) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  In the processing of step S1471, if the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is not targeted for the special symbol 1, that is, the command is directed to the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1277b to be executed is the same as the processing of steps S1472a to S1377a for the special symbol 1 described above, except that the target is changed to the special symbol 2.

  In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, when the pre-reading special pattern 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received, the unknown flag of the special pattern of interest is set, and the target unknown pattern is set until the corresponding unknown pending is exhausted. Prohibit the prefetching of special symbols. Therefore, even if the prefetching special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command with prefetching is received, the prefetch effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Also, when the received prefetching fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetching effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the prefetching effect prohibition control of the second modification, the suspension at the time of power interruption received as power restoration information when the power is turned on is set to “unknown suspension”, and the prefetching effect is not executed even when the power is restored. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold for which the pre-reading information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot specify the pre-reading determination result), the special symbol to be processed until the unknown hold is exhausted. Does not perform a look-ahead effect. Then, if the unknown reservation is exhausted, the prefetching effect is permitted. For this reason, the suspension at the time of the power failure (unknown suspension) does not affect the pre-reading effect after the power is restored. Further, since the prohibition period of the prefetch effect is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown reservations, more appropriate prefetch effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pre-reading effect and a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Also, when a prefetched special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command without prefetching is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set to “unknown hold”, and the prefetch in the target special symbol until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, the pre-reading effect prohibition control is executed together with the pre-reading determination prohibition control at the time of the state transition by the main control board 4100, so that a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time of the above-described state shift, if the number of times the time-saving state is maintained becomes four or less remaining, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination. For this reason, the special symbol 2 suspension generated during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched, and is recognized as unknown suspension by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of four) generated during the time-saving state with the remaining four fluctuations is exhausted, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-time-saving state after the state transition. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the special symbol 2 preferential digestion, the special symbol 2 of unknown reservation is digested before the special symbol 1 after the state transition. In this manner, the hold that occurred during the four changes immediately before the transition state is not set as the target of the prefetch determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the peripheral control board 4140 side receives the hold that can perform the prefetch effect until the hold is exhausted. Also, by not setting the target for the prefetching effect, the execution of the prefetching effect during a period in which a trouble easily occurs can be surely prohibited. The hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, since the pre-reading effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, it is for the special symbol 2 suspension. Therefore, execution of the prefetching effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state is not prevented.

  Further, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control for an unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power failure is performed at a timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command (unknown command) without pre-reading, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is exhausted and the fluctuation start is started. It is released at the timing of performing. In this way, when an unknown reservation occurs in the reserved storage area, the prefetch effect is prohibited, and the prefetch effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown reservation is consumed. Therefore, more accurate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed, and the pre-reading effect and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Also, as described in the first modification, the prefetch effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power need not be performed when the RAM is cleared. In this case, a judgment process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-described insertion unknown flag setting process (FIG. 82), and after the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared), The process of setting the unknown flag at the time of insertion may be ended without executing the process of (1). Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150 cac in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. As described above, when the RAM is cleared, control is performed such that the prefetching effect is permitted, so that unnecessary prefetching effect prohibitions can be eliminated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to provide an appropriate prefetching effect. .

  In the first and second modifications, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command with a mode value of “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the occurrence of a hold with pre-reading. If it is, it is not the target of the prefetching effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the prefetch effect may be prohibited when a non-specific hit (small hit) occurs in the high probability state. Specifically, in the above-described special figure prefetch execution determination processing (FIG. 84), when a special pattern 1 storage prefetch command at prefetch with prefetch is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H )), A process of determining whether or not a symbol type prefetch command (status value “66H”) has been received, and a process of determining whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state when received. If the command is received and the command is in the high probability state, the processes of steps S1473a and S1474a may be performed. Here, at the stage of pre-reading, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The small hit types include those that return the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state). If the pre-reading effect is performed even after such a small hit holding that induces the transition to the low probability state occurs, it occurs after the small hit holding, and a large hit determination is made at the time of pre-reading in the high probability state. At the start of the change in the low probability state in which the suspension has been triggered by the small hit, there may be an event of determining the deviation. At this time, if a hit-determination effect is performed in the pre-reading effect, the actual fluctuation result (outlier) not only remarkably discourages the player's expectation but also may cause distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if the prefetch command with prefetch is received, if the small hit symbol type prefetch command “6650H” is received in the high probability state, the start of the fluctuation to determine the result of the small hit (holding digestion) Prohibit pre-reading production until). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered and the player to be distrusted with the effect due to the execution of an excessive (wrong) prefetch effect with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and the prefetch effect. Reliability can be increased.

[19-2-3. At the start of the big hit game (clear the pre-reading information)]
By the way, the hold occurring during the big hit is prohibited because the pre-read determination is not executed by the main control MPU 4100a, but the pre-reading effect is prohibited. However, the hold already generated and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. The peripheral control MPU 4150a has prefetching information by prefetching determination and can perform prefetching. However, since the game state after the jackpot that has been consumed (change start) at the start of the big hit may be different from the game state at the time of the pre-read determination (the change pattern table is different), the hold at the start of the big hit is On the other hand, there is a possibility that an appropriate look-ahead effect may not be obtained. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the prefetch effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. In this way, it is possible to prevent a problem that an appropriate prefetch effect is not performed. Hereinafter, control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-described effect control process (FIG. 49).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a jackpot opening display process according to the jackpot start command (step S1710). Next, a display indicating that the big winning opening 2003 is opened is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and a big hit display process for performing a display effect (for example, a round display or the like) during the big hit game state is executed (step). S1720). After that, a big hit ending display process for performing an end effect of the big hit game state is executed (step S1730), and after the process selection flag is updated to “0” (step S1740), the big hit display process is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit opening display process. The big hit opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the above big hit display process (FIG. 85).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the start flag is set (Step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the processing of step S1411 of the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 48). If the start flag has not been set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process ends.

  On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the effect information corresponding to the pre-read command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (priority information). Notification mode) is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 is set. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Production control is performed. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the pre-reading effect information (advance notification mode) in a predetermined storage area to be identifiable (advance notification mode identifiable setting means) and the pre-notification mode on condition that the jackpot game is executed. It also has a function of setting to be unspecified (preliminary notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the effect information corresponding to the prefetch command again in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are switched and set in response to the current big hit (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and ends the big hit opening display process. Thereafter, when the big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit display process (step S1720 in FIG. 85) is executed.

  As described above, in the big hit opening display process, the effect display indicating the start of the big hit is performed, and the pre-reading effect information of the hold stored at the start of the big hit is changed according to the game state at the time of occurrence of the hold from the one according to the big hit game state. Will be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the look-ahead effect information selected under the normal probability state when the suspension occurs, and re-reads the look-ahead effect information under the high probability state that can be switched at the opportunity of the big hit. Select again. The target of the effect information clearing process in step S1712 is the look-ahead effect information, and the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 (number of reserved balls, presence / absence of a look-ahead, symbol type, change pattern, change type) , Distribution table), it is possible to reset the effect information based on the suspension information in the effect information setting process in the next step S1713. Note that the timing of resetting is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it is only necessary that the setting is reset before the jackpot round finalizing effect. This makes it possible to execute a prefetching effect appropriate for the situation with respect to the hold at the start of the big hit, and to suppress a decrease in the prefetching effect and the interest of the game.

  The target of the above-described effect information clearing process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Even when the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command with prefetch is received from the main control board 4100 and another prefetch command is received, an abnormal change in the number of reservations (the last reception When the number information is 0 and the number-of-holds information of the current reception is increased to four, etc.), the pending effect information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when the condition is satisfied is targeted for the effect information clearing process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance the failure of the look-ahead effect with respect to the hold, and to ensure proper look-ahead. It leads to the provision of directing.

  Note that the above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetch determination on the main control board side.

[20. Transition to production mode]
By the way, in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIGS. 48, 79, and 81), when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 is performed. The variation pattern reception flag is set in the processing of (1). Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting a special figure tuning effect including the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state among the plurality, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or the hit information received from the main control board 4100 (stop design of decorative symbols, type of reach effect, The determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect, the notice effect mode, the presence or absence of the extended effect, etc.) are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronized effect.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 87, an example of the effect transition in the probable change time saving state in which the number of time savings is given 64 will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition in the probable change working hours state. When the gaming state enters the probable time saving state, the special figure synchronizing effect (time saving time effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of time saving, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode after 31 times of the time saving time. Synchronized production (probable change confirmation production) is executed. In the special figure synchronizing production in the specific A production mode, a continuous production is performed to determine whether or not the time reduction state is continued in fluctuations in which the number of time savings is 10, 20, or 30, and a normal production is performed in other fluctuations. Is done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of time savings, and sets a variation pattern (a normal effect pattern, a continuous effect pattern, and a certain variation confirmation effect pattern) according to the number of time savings in the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables according to the number of times of saving (number of times of executing the lottery game in the time saving state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of times saved. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 87, the variation patterns of 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times in the probable variation time reduction state are selected from a table in which a normal effect pattern is set, and the number of times of time reduction is 10 times. , 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the change patterns after 31 time saving times are selected from the table in which the probable change confirmed effect pattern is set. Further, the continuous effect pattern includes a successful effect pattern in which the time-saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time-saving state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time savings (number of times of variation) by following the received variation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of times of time saving (number of times of variation). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as at the time of power failure. The effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 87, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects an effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the number of times of saving is 1 to 30, and selects an effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the number of times of saving 31 times.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 88, a description will be given of the effect mode transition processing in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition are executed based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition processing is executed, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of the fluctuation is received in the decorative pattern fluctuation start processing (FIG. 46) described above. The transition of the effect mode is exemplified by the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 87 to the specific B effect mode.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a time saving state, in which a continuous effect (success or failure) is executed at a predetermined number of times, and the continuous success effect is executed three times. This is a production mode. If the current mode is not the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the effect mode transition process.

  If the current mode is the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern among the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1752). If the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in Step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds 1 to the count of the number of successes and updates it (Step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update is three (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition processing ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). Thereafter, the effect mode transition process ends. Note that the count of the number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and is cleared when the special A effect mode ends.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving the predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands from the main control MPU 4100a, and switches to the specific game state (here, the time reduction state) according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine a transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect mode) without knowing the number of changes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on a command received from the main control board 4100 where the game information is always backed up. It is possible to execute the appropriate effect at the time of electric power.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are integrated (a slot game using a game ball).

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
2 outer frame 3 main body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 192 handle relay terminal plate 400 operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 650 Hitting and launching device 740 Award ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error clearing section)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display 4100 Main control board (main control means, game control board, game control section, special game state generation means, game state transition means, variable winning device control means, production Information transmitting means, gaming machine related information transmitting means, lottery game executing means, specific game executing means, pre-judgment means, game information transmitting means, starting information storage means, pattern selection table changing means, privilege giving means, prize assisting means, games Pattern selection means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board (payout control board, payout control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (effect control means, effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selecting means, effect content selecting means, effect selection information changing means, effect execution timing determining means, specific effect Execution means, predetermined effect execution means, predetermined effect control means, game information receiving means, pre-processing execution means, pre-effect execution means, pre-notification means, pre-notification mode specifying possible setting means, pre-notification mode non-setting setting means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a lottery based on a winning of a game medium in a variable winning device and performing dynamic display, and generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of the lottery. hand,
A random value acquisition means for acquiring a random value from the generated random number based on that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area;
And determining whether or not to control the variable winning device to an easy winning state in which the game medium is easy to win , and storing the random number value in a predetermined storage area before executing the determination. ,
Variable winning device control means capable of controlling the variable winning device to an easy winning state in which a game medium can easily win, based on the determination result by the easy winning state control determining means,
It is determined whether or not to execute a predetermined effect capable of notifying whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to the easy winning state, and the random number value is stored in the predetermined storage area before executing the determination. a predetermined demonstration execution determination means for,
Effect information transmitting means capable of transmitting effect information based on the determination result by the predetermined effect execution determining means,
While the dynamic display is being performed, specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that can indicate that the result of the lottery is a specific result,
On the basis of the effect information, before the variable winning device is controlled on the winning easy state, before including Kisho a predetermined demonstration execution unit capable of executing a constant effect, and
The determination by the easy winning state control determination unit and the predetermined effect execution determination unit is performed by a common process with reference to a random number value stored in the predetermined storage area ,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect execution means includes a predetermined effect restricting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the specific effect is executed.